caesar ii user guide

November 2003

Dear CAESAR II User,

Enclosed please find Version 4.50 of the CAESAR II Pipe Stress Analysis program. This package includes a CD-Rom and associated documentation.

This version of CAESAR II incorporates a number of new features and technical capabilities, some of which are listed in the table below (for a complete list of changes, refer to Chapter 1 of the User’s Manual).

• Code revisions incorporated: B31.1, B31.4, ASME NC, ASME ND, IGE/TD/12, API-610

• A reducer element has been added.

• New dynamic help system for piping input and configuration.

• The structural steel interface has been redesigned for easier operation.

Please note that at this time, the new IGE/TD/12 code is not approved, therefore use of this code has been disabled for the initial release of Version 4.50. Additionally, the bi-directional link with CADWorx/PIPE is currently being finalized. If you are actively using either of these technologies, do not upgrade your machine to Version 4.50 at this time.

The CD-ROM has an Auto-Run feature that should start the installation driver as soon as the CD tray is closed. This installation driver includes a number of options, in addition to the installation of Version 4.50. The installation of Version 4.50 will create a group on the startup menu for subsequent access. Additionally a desktop shortcut icon to C2.EXE will be placed on the desktop. Please refer to Chapter 2 of the User’s Manual for additional details.

Please be aware that Version 4.50 is not downward compatible with any previous version of the software. Input files from older versions are upward compatible as always.

Version 4.50 (like all previous versions) of CAESAR II has been tested according to the QA standards established at COADE. Jobs created on earlier versions are compatible with Version 4.50 and should yield the same results as earlier versions (except as noted in the Technical Changes on the next page).

Regards,

CAESAR II Development Staff

CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes

• Revised material database for B31.1 A2001 changes

• Added Reducer element.

• Improved user interaction and error reporting in static load case editor.

• Improved graphics changes include:

o A walk-through option is available. o The static output processor can now produce colored stress plots of the piping system. o A graphical find (zoom to) option has been added. o Instant use of graphics, even before drawing is completed. o Resizable restraint/hanger symbols

• Added Spectrum wizard for the generation of earthquake and relief valve spectra.

• Revised codes: B31.1, B31.4, ASME NC, ASME ND, IGE/TD/12, API-610.

• Included additional FRP data files.

• The static output processor remembers all user settings (filters, labels, and report size).

• Added dynamic help system for piping & structural input and configuration.

• Added automatic acquisition of website software updates.

• Combined WRC-107/297 module for local stress calculations.

• Redesigned the structural steel interface for easier operation.

• Implemented a “new job wizard” for the creation of structural steel input models.

• Modified to allow multiple instances of CAESAR II to run

• Implemented “Load Case Template” for recommending static load cases.

• Modified to allow access to the output for expired date or run limited ESLs

CAESAR II Version 4.50 - Technical Changes

The following list details changes to CAESAR II for Version 4.50, which may affect the numeric results.

• For the offshore codes (B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DnV) the computed “code” equivalent/combined stress replaces the standard mechanical stress value of the “3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity” in the 132 column output stress report.

• For B31.8 Ch VIII, the A2000 addendum changed the “Ss” (tangential shear stress) term to “St” (torsional stress). Version 4.50 therefore no longer includes the shear component in the combined stress computation.

• For B31.8 Ch VIII, the A2000 addendum added corrosion to the computation of the combined stress. Versions of CAESAR II prior to 4.50 considered all stresses as either corroded or non-corroded (for B31.8 Ch VIII.) As of Version 4.50, corrosion can be considered separately for the combined stress computation.

• When using “Class 1 Flexibilities”, activated via the configuration file, the Kin and Kout values were switched. Version 4.50 applies them correctly.

• Version 4.50 distributes an updated material database that includes the revisions for B31.1 A2001. These revisions include changes to the expansion coefficients, which will lead to different results compared to earlier versions of the software.

• Entering the piping input with an “old” job results in a dialog asking if the physical material properties should be converted from constant values to dynamic values automatically updated from the material database. To ensure the results of Version 4.50 match the results of prior versions, pick [Yes] to keep the old values. Picking [No] may cause a property value change (depending on whether the values for that specific material have been updated), resulting in different results.

• A correction has been made to the “wind load generator” which corrects a unit’s conversion problem IF “escarpment data” was specified.

• The preload on “user pre-defined” spring hangers was not correctly considered in generating the restraint report IF the load case hanger switch was set to “rigid”.

• For models subjected to hydrodynamic loading, where no wave height was specified (only current loading), CAESAR II did not correctly determine the “submerged / non-submerged” status of the element. Therefore, current loading was applied to all elements where “wave loading” was activated in the input. Version 4.50 corrects this problem.

CAESAR II, VERSION 4.50 Copyright(c) COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 1984-2004, all rights reserved.

(LAST REVISED 11/2003)

This page is intentionally left blank.

CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Table of Contents

Preface 1-1

CAESAR II LICENSE AGREEMENT 1-2ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER 1-2LICENSE GRANT 1-2TERM 1-2LIMITED WARRANTY 1-3ENTIRE AGREEMENT 1-3LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES 1-3GENERAL 1-4DISCLAIMER - CAESAR II 1-4

HOOPS‘ License Grant 1-5

Introduction 1-1

What is CAESAR II? 1-2What are the applications of CAESAR II? 1-2What distinguishes CAESAR II from other commercial pipe stress packages? 1-3About the CAESAR II Documentation 1-4Program Support/User Assistance 1-5Software Revision Procedures 1-6

How Are Builds Identified? 1-6Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version? 1-6How Are Builds Announced? 1-7How Are Builds Obtained? 1-7What is Contained In A Specific Build? 1-7How Are Builds Installed? 1-7How Can Builds Be Detected/Checked? 1-7How Do You Archive and Reinstall an Old, Patched Version? 1-8

Updates and License Types 1-9Full Run 1-9Lease 1-9Limited Run 1-9

Summary of the Latest Program Improvements 1-10CAESAR II Technical Changes 1-11

Installation U2-1

Overview U2-2System and Hardware Requirements U2-3Installation Menu Options U2-4

CAESAR II Version 4.50 U2-4Installation Process U2-4

1


Checking the Installation U2-12Configuration U2-12

Browse CD ROM U2-15ODBC Drivers U2-15Product Demos U2-16Internet Explorer U2-16ESL Drivers U2-17Contact Information U2-18Product Information U2-19Exit U2-19

ESL Installation on a Network U2-20Novell File Server ESL Installation U2-20Novell Workstation ESL Installation U2-20Windows server Installation U2-20

Notes on Network ESLs U2-21Re-Enabling the AutoRun Feature U2-22

Quick Start and Basic Operation U3-1

CAESAR II Quick Start U3-2Starting CAESAR II U3-2

Basic Operation U3-5Piping Input Generation U3-5Error Checking the Model U3-10Building the Load Cases U3-11Executing Static Analysis U3-13Static Output Review U3-14

Main Menu U4-1

The CAESAR II Main Menu U4-2File Menu U4-3Input Menu U4-5Analysis Menu U4-6Output Menu U4-7Tools Menu U4-8Diagnostics Menu U4-9ESL Menu U4-10Help Menu U4-11

Piping Input U5-1

Spreadsheet Overview U5-2Undo/Redo U5-2Customize Toolbar U5-3

Data Fields U5-3

2


Node Numbers U5-3Element Lengths U5-4Element Direction Cosines U5-4 Pipe Section Properties U5-5Operating Conditions: Temperatures and Pressures U5-5Special Element Information U5-6Boundary Conditions U5-7Loading Conditions U5-7Piping Material U5-8Material Elastic Properties U5-8Densities U5-8

Auxiliary Data Area U5-9Bend Data U5-9Rigid Weight U5-10Expansion Joint U5-10Restraints U5-11Displacements U5-12Forces U5-13Uniform Loads U5-13Wind/Wave U5-14Allowable Stresses U5-15Stress Intensification Factors/Tees U5-18Flexible Nozzles U5-19Hangers U5-20Node Names U5-21Offsets U5-21

Menu Commands U5-22File Menu U5-22Edit Menu U5-24Model Menu U5-27Kaux Menu U5-32

3-D Modeler U5-363D Graphics Configuration U5-38HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations U5-403D Graphics Highlights: Materials, Diameters, Wall Thickness, Insulation U5-413D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure U5-423D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads U5-42Limiting amount of displayed information: Find Node, Range, Cutting Plane U5-443D Graphics Interactive Feature: Walk Through U5-47

Error Checking, Static Load Cases, and Analysis U6-1

Error Checking U6-2Fatal Error Dialog U6-3Warning Dialog U6-4Note Dialog U6-5Available Commands U6-5

Building Static Load Cases U6-7

3


Providing Wind Data U6-9Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters U6-11Execution of Static Analysis U6-12Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases U6-16

Definition of a Load Case U6-16Load Case Options Tab U6-21User Control of Produced Results Data U6-22

Output Status U6-22Output Type U6-22Snubbers Active? U6-23Hanger Design U6-23Friction Multiplier U6-23

User-Controlled Combination Methods U6-24Algebraic U6-24Scalar U6-24SRSS U6-24ABS U6-25Max U6-25Min U6-25SignMax U6-25SignMin U6-25

Recommended Load Cases U6-26Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection U6-27

Static Output Processor U7-1

Entry Into the Static Output Processor U7-2Report Options U7-6

Displacements U7-6Restraints U7-6Restraint Summary U7-7Global Element Forces U7-7Local Element Forces U7-8Stresses U7-9Sorted Stresses U7-10Code Compliance Report U7-11 U7-11Cumulative Usage Report U7-12General Computed Results U7-13

Load Case Report U7-13Hanger Table with Text U7-13Input Echo U7-14Miscellaneous Data U7-14Warnings U7-15

Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File U7-16Notes on Plotting Static Results U7-18

4


“SHOWing” Results on the Plot U7-19Main Show Menu U7-19Displacement Sub Menu: U7-19Restraints Sub Menu: U7-20Forces/Moments Sub Menu: U7-20Stress Sub Menu: U7-22

3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor U7-23Deflected Shape U7-23Maximum Displacements U7-24Zoom to Selection U7-24Show Event Viewer Grid U7-24Maximum Restraints Loads U7-25Overstress U7-25Maximum Code Stress U7-25Code Stress Colors by Value U7-26Code Stress Colors by Percent U7-26

Notes on Animation of Static Results U7-28

Dynamic Input and Analysis U8-1

Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II U8-2Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis U8-3Major Steps in Dynamics Input U8-5

Overview of the Dynamic Analysis Input Processor U8-6Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu U8-6

Input Overview Based on Analysis Category U8-9Modal U8-9

Specifying the Loads U8-9Snubbers U8-10Control Parameters U8-10Advanced Parameters Show Screen U8-10

Harmonic U8-11Specifying the Loads U8-11Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model U8-13Control Parameters U8-13

Earthquake (Spectrum) U8-14Specifying the Loads U8-14Spectrum Load Cases U8-16Static/Dynamic Combinations U8-18Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model U8-19Control Parameters U8-19Advanced Parameters U8-19

Relief Loads (Spectrum) U8-20Specifying the Loads U8-20Relief Load Synthesis U8-20

DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard U8-21Save to File U8-22

5


OK U8-22Cancel U8-22

UBC U8-22Spectrum Name U8-23Importance Factor U8-23Seismic Coefficient Ca U8-23Seismic Coefficient Cv U8-24

ASCE7 U8-24Spectrum Name U8-24Importance Factor U8-25Site Coefficient Fa U8-25Site Coefficient Fv U8-25Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS) U8-25Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1) U8-25Response Modification R U8-25

IBC U8-25Spectrum Name U8-26Importance Factor U8-26Site Coefficient Fa U8-26Site Coefficient Fv U8-27Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS) U8-27Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1) U8-27Response Modification R U8-27

B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum U8-27Spectrum Name U8-28Opening Time (milliseconds) U8-28

User Defined Time History Waveform U8-28Spectrum Name U8-28Max. Table Frequency U8-29Number of Points U8-29Enter Pulse Data U8-29Generate Spectrum U8-29

Spectrum Definitions U8-31Force Sets U8-32Spectrum/Load Cases U8-33Static/Dynamic Combinations U8-33Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model U8-33Control Parameters U8-34Advanced U8-34

Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) U8-35Specifying the Load U8-35Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation U8-35Spectrum Definitions U8-35Force Sets U8-35Spectrum Load Cases U8-35Static/Dynamic Combinations U8-35

6


Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model U8-35Time History U8-36

Specifying The Load U8-36Time History Profile Definitions U8-36Force Sets U8-37Time History Load Cases U8-37Static/Dynamic Combinations U8-37Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models U8-37Control Parameters U8-38Advanced U8-38

Error Handling and Analyzing the Job U8-39Performing the Analysis U8-39Modes U8-39Harmonic U8-40Selection of Phase Angles U8-40Spectrum U8-41Time History U8-41

Dynamic Output Processing U9-1

Entry into the Processor U9-2Report Types U9-5

Displacements U9-5Restraints U9-5Local Forces U9-6Global Forces U9-7Stresses U9-7Forces/Stresses U9-8Cumulative Usage U9-8Mass Participation Factors U9-9Natural Frequencies U9-10Modes Mass Normalized U9-10Modes Unity Normalized U9-10Included Mass Data U9-11Input Listing U9-12Mass Model U9-12Boundary Conditions U9-12

Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File U9-133D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor U9-14

Save Animation to File U9-15Animation of Static Results - Displacements U9-15

Animation of Dynamic Results – Modal/Spectrum U9-16Animation of Dynamic Results – Harmonic U9-16Animation of Dynamic Results – Time History U9-16

7


Structural Steel Modeling U10-1

Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II U10-23D HOOPs Graphics U10-9Sample Input U10-11Structural Steel Example #1 U10-11Structural Steel Example #2 U10-15Structural Steel Example #3 U10-27

Buried Pipe Modeling U11-1

CAESAR II Underground Pipe Modeler U11-2Using the Underground Pipe Modeler U11-3Notes on the Soil Model U11-9Recommended Procedures U11-12Original - Unburied - Model U11-13

Equipment and Component Compliance U12-1

Equipment and Component Evaluation U12-2Intersection Stress Intensification Factors U12-3Bend Stress Intensification Factors U12-5

Pressure Stiffening U12-6Flanges Attached to Bend Ends U12-6Bends with Trunnions U12-7Stress Concentrations and Intensifications U12-7

WRC 107 (Vessel Stresses) U12-8WRC 107 Stress Summations U12-13

WRC Bulletin 297 U12-16Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations U12-19

Note on bolt tightening stress U12-23Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler U12-24

Leak Pressure Ratio U12-24Effective Gasket Modulus U12-24Flange Rating U12-24

Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines, B31G U12-28Expansion Joint Rating U12-33Structural Steel Checks - AISC U12-40

Global Parameters U12-40Structural Code U12-41Allowable Stress Increase Factor U12-41Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz U12-42Young’s Modulus U12-42Material Yield Strength U12-42Bending Coefficient U12-42

8


Form Factor Qa U12-42Allow Sidesway U12-42Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . . U12-43Minimum Desired Unity Check U12-43Maximum Desired Unity Check U12-43

Local Member Data U12-44Member Start Node U12-44Member End Node U12-44Member Type U12-44In- And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz U12-46Unsupported Axial Length U12-46Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending) U12-46Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending) U12-46Double Angle Spacing U12-46Young’s Modulus U12-46Material Yield Strength U12-46Axial Member Force U12-46In-Plane Bending Moment U12-47Out-of-Plane Bending Moment U12-47In-Plane “Small” Bending Moment U12-47In-Plane “Large” Bending Moment U12-47Out-of-Plane “Small” Bending Moment U12-47Out-of-Plane “Large” Bending Moment U12-47

AISC Output Reports U12-47Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Codes U12-49

NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) U12-50NEMA Turbine Example U12-51

API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) U12-57Vertical In-Line Pumps U12-63

API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) U12-64API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) U12-66Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters U12-71API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) U12-73

9


10

��

�� !"�� !#$$�%�� &

�� '�� %��((�)��*

CAESAR II LICENSE AGREEMENT CAESAR II - User’s Guide

CAESAR II LICENSE AGREEMENTLicensor: COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 12777 Jones Rd., Ste. 480, Hous-ton, Texas 77070

ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER

YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PACKAGE. USING THIS PACKAGE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS.

The enclosed proprietary encoded materials, hereinafter referred to as the Licensed Pro-gram(s), are the property of COADE and are provided to you under the terms and condi-tions of this License Agreement. You assume responsibility for the selection of the appropriate Licensed Program(s) to achieve the intended results, and for the installation, use and results obtained from the selected Licensed Program(s).

LICENSE GRANT

In return for the payment of the license fee associated with the acquisition of the Licensed Program(s) from COADE, COADE hereby grants you the following non-exclusive rights with regard to the Licensed Program(s):

a. Use of the License Program(s) on one machine. Under no circumstance is the License Program to be executed without a COADE External Software Lock (ESL).

b. To transfer the Licensed Program(s) and license it to a third party if the third party acknowledges in writing its agreement to accept the Licensed Program(s) under the terms and conditions of this License Agreement; if you transfer the Licensed Program(s), you must at the same time either transfer all copies whether printed or in machine-readable form to the same party or destroy any copies not so trans-ferred; the requirement to transfer and/or destroy copies of the Licensed Pro-gram(s) also pertains to any and all modifications and portions of Licensed Program(s) contained or merged into other programs.

You agree to reproduce and include the copyright notice as it appears on the Licensed Pro-gram(s) on any copy, modification or merged portion of the Licensed Program(s).

THIS LICENSE DOES NOT GIVE YOU ANY RIGHT TO USE COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) OR ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION THEREOF, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.

IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION OF THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) TO ANOTHER PARTY, THE LICENSE GRANTED HEREUNDER TO YOU IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED.

TERM

This License Agreement is effective upon acceptance and use of the Licensed Program(s) until terminated in accordance with the terms of this License Agreement. You may termi-nate the License Agreement at any time by destroying the Licensed Program(s) together with all copies, modifications, and merged portions thereof in any form. This License Agreement will also terminate upon conditions set forth elsewhere in this Agreement or automatically in the event you fail to comply with any term or condition of this License

2 Preface

CAESAR II - User’s Guide CAESAR II LICENSE AGREEMENT

Agreement. You hereby agree upon such termination to destroy the Licensed Program(s) together with all copies, modifications, and merged portions thereof in any form.

LIMITED WARRANTY

The Licensed Program(s), i.e. the tangible proprietary software, is provided “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AND EXPLICITLY EXCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the Licensed Program(s) is with you.

Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of limited warranties, and, in those jurisdic-tions the above exclusions may not apply. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from one jurisdiction to another.

COADE does not warrant that the functions contained in the Licensed Program(s) will meet your requirements or that the operation of the program will be uninterrupted or error free.

COADE does warrant, however, that the CD(s), i.e. the tangible physical medium on which the Licensed Program(s) is furnished, to be free from defects in materials and work-manship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you as evidenced by a copy of your receipt.

COADE warrants that any program errors will be fixed by COADE, at COADE’s expense, as soon as possible after the problem is reported and verified. However, only those cus-tomers current on their update/maintenance contracts are eligible to receive the corrected version of the program.

ENTIRE AGREEMENT

This written Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties concerning the Licensed Program(s). No agent, distributor, salesman or other person acting or repre-senting themselves to act on behalf of COADE has the authority to modify or supplement the limited warranty contained herein, nor any of the other specific provisions of this Agreement, and no such modifications or supplements shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by an officer of COADE having authority to act on behalf of COADE in this regard.

LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES

COADE’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be:

a. the replacement of any CD not meeting COADE’s “Limited Warranty” as defined herein and which is returned to COADE or an authorized COADE dealer with a copy of your receipt, or

b. if COADE or the dealer is unable to deliver a replacement CD which is free of defects in materials or workmanship you may terminate this License Agreement by returning the Licensed Program(s) and associated documentation and you will be refunded all monies paid to COADE to acquire the Licensed Program(s).

IN NO EVENT WILL COADE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, AND OTHER INCIDENTAL

Preface 3

CAESAR II - User’s Guide CAESAR II LICENSE AGREEMENT

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) EVEN IF COADE OR AN AUTHORIZED COADE DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM-AGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.

SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT PERMIT LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIA-BILITY FOR INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THAT THE ABOVE LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY IN THOSE JURISDIC-TIONS. FURTHERMORE, COADE DOES NOT PURPORT TO DISCLAIM ANY LIA-BILITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY DEFECTS IN THE CDS OR OTHER PRODUCTS PROVIDED BY COADE PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREE-MENT.

GENERAL

You may not sublicense, assign, or transfer your rights under this License Agreement or the Licensed Program(s) except as expressly provided in this License Agreement. Any attempt otherwise to sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations hereunder is void and constitutes a breach of this License Agreement giving COADE the right to terminate as specified herein. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of Texas, United States of America.

The initial license fee includes 1 year of support, maintenance and enhancements to the program. After the first 1 year term, such updates and support are optional at the then cur-rent update fee.

Questions concerning this License Agreement, and all notices required herein, shall be made by contacting COADE in writing at COADE, 12777 Jones RD., Ste. 480, Houston, Texas, 77070, or by telephone, 281-890-4566.

DISCLAIMER - CAESAR II

Copyright (c) COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 2003, all rights reserved.

This proprietary software is the property of COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. and is provided to the user pursuant to a COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. pro-gram license agreement containing restrictions on its use. It may not be copied or distrib-uted in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner except as expressly permitted by the COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. program license agreement.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFT-WARE, INC. SHALL NOT HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO THE USER IN EXCESS OF THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID TO COADE UNDER THE COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR THIS SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT WILL COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. BE LIABLE TO THE USER FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSE-QUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED AS TO THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IT IS THE USERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY THE RESULTS OF THE PROGRAM.

Preface 4

CAESAR II - User’s Guide HOOPS‘ License Grant

HOOPS License GrantCOADE grants to CAESAR II Users a non-exclusive license to use the Software Appli-cation under the terms stated in this Agreement.

CAESAR II Users agree not to alter, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Software Appli-cation. CAESAR II Users will not copy the Software except: (i) as necessary to install the Software Application onto a computer(s)... or (ii) to create an archival copy. CAESAR II Users agree that any such copies of the Software Application shall contain the same pro-prietary notices which appear on and in the Software Application.

Title to and ownership of the intellectual property rights associated with the Software Application and any copies remain with COADE and its suppliers.

CAESAR II Users are hereby notified that Tech Soft America, L.L. C 1301 Marina Vil-lage Parkway, Suite 300, Alameda, CA 94501 ("Tech Soft America") is a third-party ben-eficiary to this Agreement to the extent that this Agreement contains provisions which relate to CAESAR II Users’ use of the Software Application. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Tech Soft America and are enforceable by Tech Soft America in addition to COADE.

In no event shall COADE or its suppliers be liable in any way for indirect, special, or con-sequential damages of any nature, including without limitation, lost business profits, or liability or injury to third persons, whether foreseeable or not, regardless of whether COADE or its suppliers have been advised of the possibility of such damages.

Preface 5

HOOPS‘ License Grant CAESAR II - User’s Guide

6 Preface

�� +,(��)��

��%��((- �� %��((-�� "��)��%��((�� %��.��- �� )��%��((��"��)�� !��%) ��/�� &%��0��'��1��)�� 2� �� 3%)��(� ��'�� +4

�� '�� )��%��((5��6��)� 5�� )��*

What is CAESAR II? CAESAR II - User’s Guide

What is CAESAR II?CAESAR II is a PC-based pipe stress analysis software program developed, marketed and sold by COADE Engineering Software. This software package is an engineering tool used in the mechanical design and analysis of piping systems. The CAESAR II user cre-ates a model of the piping system using simple beam elements and defines the loading conditions imposed on the system. With this input, CAESAR II produces results in the form of displacements, loads, and stresses throughout the system. Additionally, CAESAR II compares these results to limits specified by recognized codes and standards. The popularity of CAESAR II is a reflection of COADE’s expertise in programming and engineering, as well as COADE’s dedication to service and quality.

What are the applications of CAESAR II?CAESAR II is most often used for the mechanical design of new piping systems. Hot pip-ing systems present a unique problem to the mechanical engineer—these irregular struc-tures experience great thermal strain that must be absorbed by the piping, supports, and attached equipment. These “structures” must be stiff enough to support their own weight and also flexible enough to accept thermal growth. These loads, displacements, and stresses can be estimated through analysis of the piping model in CAESAR II. To aid in this design by analysis, CAESAR II incorporates many of the limitations placed on these systems and their attached equipment. These limits are typically specified by engineering bodies (such as the ASME B31 committees, ASME Section VIII, and the Welding Research Council) or by manufacturers of piping-related equipment (API, NEMA, or EJMA).

CAESAR II is not limited to thermal analysis of piping systems. CAESAR II also has the capability of modelling and analyzing the full range of static and dynamic loads which may be imposed on the system. Therefore, CAESAR II is not only a tool for new design but it is also valuable in troubleshooting or redesigning existing systems. Here, one can determine the cause of failure or evaluate the severity of unanticipated operating condi-tions such as fluid/piping interaction or mechanical vibration caused by rotating equip-ment.

1-2 Introduction

CAESAR II - User’s Guide What distinguishes CAESAR II from other commercial

What distinguishes CAESAR II from other commercial pipe stress packages?

COADE treats CAESAR II more as a service than a product. Our staff of experienced pipe stress engineers are involved in day-to-day software development, program support, and training. This approach has produced a program which most closely fits today’s requirements of the pipe stress industry. Data entry is simple and straight forward through annotated input screens and/or spreadsheets. CAESAR II provides the widest range of modelling and analysis capabilities without becoming too complicated for simple system analysis. Users may tailor their CAESAR II installation through default setting and cus-tomized databases. Comprehensive input graphics confirms the model construction before the analysis is made. The program’s interactive output processor presents results on the monitor for quick review or sends complete reports to a file or printer. CAESAR II is an up-to-date package that not only utilizes standard analysis guidelines but also provides the latest recognized opinions for these analyses.

CAESAR II also offers seamless interaction with COADE’s CADWorx/PIPE, an AutoCAD based design and drafting system for creating orthographic, isometric and 3D piping drawings. The 2-way-link automatically generates stress analysis models of piping layouts, or creates spectacular stress isometrics in minutes from CAESAR II models.

CAESAR II is a field-proven engineering analysis program. It is a widely recognized product with a large customer base and an excellent support and development record. COADE is a strong and stable company where service is a major commitment.

Introduction 1-3

About the CAESAR II Documentation CAESAR II - User’s Guide

About the CAESAR II DocumentationTo address the sheer volume of information available on CAESAR II and present it in a concise and useful manner to the analyst the program documentation is presented in three separate manuals:

1. The User’s Guide describes the basic operation and flow of the many routines found in CAESAR II. This document provides necessary installation information, gives an overview of the program capabilities, and introduces model creation, analysis, and output review. It is intended as a general road map for the program. This general doc-ument is the first source of information.

2. The Technical Reference Manual explains, in detail, the function of, input for, and output from each module of the program. This manual also explains much of the the-ory behind CAESAR II calculations. The Technical Reference Manual should be referred to whenever the user needs more information than is provided by the User’s Guide.

3. The Application Guide provides examples of how to use CAESAR II. These exam-ples illustrate methods of modeling individual piping components as well as complete piping systems. Here one can find tutorials on system modeling and analysis. The Application Guide is a reference providing quick “how to” information on specific subjects.

In addition to these three manuals, a Quick Reference Guide is included with the soft-ware package. The Quick Reference Guide provides the user with commonly referenced information in a lightweight, easy-to-carry notebook.

1-4 Introduction

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Program Support/User Assistance

Program Support/User AssistanceCOADE’s staff understands that CAESAR II is not only a complex analysis tool but also, at times, an elaborate process—one that may not be obvious to the casual user. While our documentation is intended to address the questions raised regarding piping analysis, sys-tem modeling, and results interpretation, not all the answers can be quickly found in these volumes.

COADE understands the engineer’s need to produce efficient, economical, and expedi-tious designs. To that end, COADE has a staff of helpful professionals ready to address any CAESAR II issues raised by all users. CAESAR II support is available by telephone, fax, the Internet, and by mail; literally hundreds of support calls are answered every week. COADE provides this service at no additional charge to the user. It is expected, however, that questions focus on the current version of the program.

Formal training in CAESAR II and pipe stress analysis is also available from COADE. COADE conducts regular training classes in Houston and provides in-house and open attendance courses around the world. These courses focus on the expertise available at COADE—modeling, analysis, and design.

COADE Technical Support:

Phone: 281-890-4566 E-mail: [email protected]

Fax: 281-890-3301 Web: www.coade.com

Introduction 1-5

Software Revision Procedures CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Software Revision ProceduresCOADE software products are not static; they are changed continually to reflect engineer-ing code addenda, operational enhancements, user requests, operating system modifica-tions, and corrections. New versions are planned and targeted for a specific release date. However, there may be corrections necessary to the “currently shipping” version, before the next version can be released. When this occurs, a correction to the “currently shipping” version is made. This correction is referred to as a “Build.”

Changes and corrections are accumulated until an error producing incorrect results is found. When this occurs, the build is finalized, announced, and posted to the Web site. Some COADE users have expressed concern over tracking, archiving, and distributing the various builds generated between major releases. In order to alleviate this problem for our users, all maintenance Builds for new releases contain all previous builds. In other words, Build Y contains Build X. This increases the download size and time required to obtain the Build, but only one build is required at any given time.

How Are Builds Identified?

When posted on the Web Builds are identified with the program identifier and the date the Build was generated.

Builds have a naming convention, as follows. The first character(s) of the file name repre-sent the COADE program being updated:

These identifying characters are then followed by six digits representing the date of the Build. The next character is a single letter representing the ESL version (the ESL is the External Software Lock used by the programs). The character U or F represents an unlim-ited or full-run version, L is an execution limited version, D is a dealer version. The fol-lowing examples illustrate this naming convention.

Be sure to obtain the correct ESL version of a particular Build. If the Build does not match your ESL, and you install it, the software will not function. You will receive error mes-sages that the ESL cannot be found, or you have an improper version.

Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version?

No! As new versions are released, additional input items become necessary and must be stored in the program data files. In addition, file formats change, databases grow, and so on. A Build is intended for one specific version of the software. Using a Build on a differ-ent version (without specific advice from COADE personnel) is a sure way to cripple the software.

C2 for CAESAR II TK for TANKCC for CODECALC P for CADWorx/PIPEPV for PV Elite F for CADWorx/P&ID

Build Name CorrelationC2000801F.EXE CAESAR II, Build of Aug. 1, 2000, full run usersC2000801L.EXE CAESAR II, Build of Aug. 1, 2000, limited-run usersP971117D.EXE CADWorx/PIPE Build of Nov. 17, 1997, dealers

1-6 Introduction

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Software Revision Procedures

How Are Builds Announced?

When a Build becomes available, the NEWS file maintained on the Web site is updated. All entries in this news file are dated for ease of reference. Users should check one of these news files at least once a month to ensure they stay current with the software.

Corrections and Builds are also published in the COADE newsletter, Mechanical Engi-neering News.

If users register with an E-mail address, they will be notified via E-mail of all new Builds.

How Are Builds Obtained?

Builds are posted to COADE’s Internet Web site (http://www.coade.com). The Builds are arranged in subdirectories by program. Each file contained in the directory includes a description defining what it contains, its size, and the date it was created.

Decide which Build file you need and simply download it.

What is Contained In A Specific Build?

Each patch file contains a file named BUILD.TXT. This is a plain ASCII text file that can be viewed with any text editor or simply printed to the system printer. This text file con-tains a description of all corrections and enhancements made, which are contained in the current patch. When necessary, additional usage instructions may be found in this file.

How Are Builds Installed?

Builds distributed for Windows applications use a Windows installation procedure. The EXE is a self-extracting archive, which extracts to a number of sub-directories, each con-taining sufficient files to fit on a 1.44 diskette. This first diskette (directory) contains a standard SETUP.EXE program to actually install the Build. This procedure ensures that necessary files are registered with the system and that the “Uninstall” utility can perform its task.

How Can Builds Be Detected/Checked?

When a Build is ready to be released, the Main Menu module is revised to reflect the Build level. This allows the user to see, on the Main Program Menu, which Build is in use. To see which program modules have been modified, you can run a COADE utility program from within the program directory.

From the Utility/Tools menu, select the option for “COADE EXE Scanner.” This option scans each of the EXE modules in the program directory and lists its size, memory requirements, and Build Level. A sample display from this utility is shown in the table below.

By reviewing the following table, users can determine which modules have been patched and to what level.

Introduction 1-7

Software Revision Procedures CAESAR II - User’s Guide

How Do You Archive and Reinstall an Old, Patched Version?

When a new version of the software is released, what should be done with the old, existing version? The distribution disks sent from COADE should obviously be saved. Addition-ally, any Builds obtained should also be archived with the original diskettes. This will allow full usage of this version at some later time, if it becomes necessary.

To reinstall an older version of the software, the distribution diskettes from COADE should be installed first. Then, the last Build should be installed. Each Build includes the modifications made in all prior Builds.

1-8 Introduction

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Updates and License Types

Updates and License TypesCAESAR II update sets are identified by their version number. The current release of CAESAR II is Version 4.5. COADE schedules and distributes these updates approxi-mately every nine months, depending on their scope and necessity. The type of CAESAR II license determines whether or not a user receives these updates. There are three types of CAESAR II licenses:

Full Run

Provides unlimited access to CAESAR II and one year of updates, maintenance, and sup-port. Updates, maintenance, and support are available on an annual basis after the first year.

Lease

Provides unlimited access to CAESAR II with updates, maintenance, and support pro-vided as long as the lease is in effect.

Limited Run

Provides 50 static or dynamic analyses of piping system models over an unlimited period of time, but does not include program updates. The user is upgraded (if necessary) when-ever a new set of 50 “runs” is purchased.

COADE only ships the current version of CAESAR II, no matter which type of license. Updates are automatically delivered to all full run users who purchase updates, mainte-nance, and support, and all lease users.

Introduction 1-9

Summary of the Latest Program Improvements CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Summary of the Latest Program Improvements

CAESAR II Version 4.50 contains some major new features as listed in the table below.

CAESAR II Version 4.50 Features

• Revised material database for B31.1 A2001 changes

• Added Reducer element.

• Improved user interaction and error reporting in static load case editor.

• Improved graphics changes include:

- A walk-through option is available.

- The static output processor can now produce colored stress plots of the piping system.

- A graphical find (zoom to) option has been added.

- Instant use of graphics, even before drawing is completed.

- Resizable restraint/hanger symbols

• Added Spectrum wizard for the generation of earthquake and relief valve spectra.

• Revised codes: B31.1, B31.4, ASME NC, ASME ND, IGE/TD/12, API-610.

• Included additional FRP data files.

• The static output processor remembers all user settings (filters, labels, and report size).

• Added dynamic help system for piping & structural input and configuration.

• Added automatic acquisition of website software updates.

• Combined WRC-107/297 module for local stress calculations.

• Redesigned the structural steel interface for easier operation.

• Implemented a "new job wizard" for the creation of structural steel input models.

• Modified to allow multiple instances of CAESAR II to run

• Implemented "Load Case Template" for recommending static load cases.

• Modified to allow access to the output for expired date or run limited ESLs

1-10 Introduction

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Summary of the Latest Program Improvements

CAESAR II Technical Changes

The following list details changes to CAESAR II for Version 4.50, which may affect the numeric results.

• For the offshore codes (B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DnV) the computed "code" equivalent/combined stress replaces the standard mechanical stress value of the "3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity" in the 132 column output stress report.

• For B31.8 Ch VIII, the A2000 addendum changed the "Ss" (tangential shear stress) term to "St" (torsional stress). Version 4.50 therefore no longer includes the shear component in the combined stress computation.

• For B31.8 Ch VIII, the A2000 addendum added corrosion to the computation of the combined stress. Versions of CAESAR II prior to 4.50 considered all stresses as either corroded or non-corroded (for B31.8 Ch VIII.) As of Version 4.50, corrosion can be considered separately for the combined stress computation.

• When using "Class 1 Flexibilities", activated via the configuration file, the Kin and Kout values were switched. Version 4.50 applies them correctly.

• Version 4.50 distributes an updated material database that includes the revisions for B31.1 A2001. These revisions include changes to the expansion coefficients, which will lead to different results compared to earlier versions of the software.

• Entering the piping input with an "old" job results in a dialog asking if the physical material properties should be converted from constant values to dynamic values auto-matically updated from the material database. To ensure the results of Version 4.50 match the results of prior versions, pick [Yes] to keep the old values. Picking [No] may cause a property value change (depending on whether the values for that specific material have been updated), resulting in different results.

• A correction has been made to the "wind load generator" which corrects a unit's con-version problem IF "escarpment data" was specified.

• The preload on "user pre-defined" spring hangers was not correctly considered in gen-erating the restraint report IF the load case hanger switch was set to "rigid".

• For models subjected to hydrodynamic loading, where no wave height was specified (only current loading), CAESAR II did not correctly determine the "submerged / non-submerged" status of the element. Therefore, current loading was applied to all ele-ments where "wave loading" was activated in the input. Version 4.50 corrects this problem.

Introduction 1-11

Summary of the Latest Program Improvements CAESAR II - User’s Guide

1-12 Introduction

�� ,(��

�� 0��7)��)��)��)�� *

��$'��'��0 �� %��#��0��7)�� (�� 8�)�$ �� !�%��(�� 9�0��.�� 49��9�0��.��%�� +�� )��)��1��)��

Overview CAESAR II - User’s Guide

OverviewThe CAESAR II installation commences as soon as you insert the CD-ROM into the drive and shut the drawer. The installation program allows total or partial installations, diagnostic checks of the installation, multi-language support, and ease of updating. This chapter will explain the process of running the CAESAR II setup application.

The typical setup for most computers allows the “auto-run” feature to access the CD and initiate the installation program. (If the “auto-run” feature has been disabled, Windows Explorer should be used to scan the CD and invoke the SETUP.EXE program. The last section of this chapter details the steps necessary to re-enable the “auto-run” feature.)

Once the installation program is initialized, a menu of context-sensitive options is dis-played on the screen.

For users upgrading to a new version of CAESAR II, the installation program can be instructed to place the new files in the same directory where the current version resides. The new version files will overwrite the old version files where appropriate.

CAESAR II can be run from anywhere on the system hard disk. Keep the job files in one or more data or project directories separate from the CAESAR II installation directory.

2-2 Installation

CAESAR II - User’s Guide System and Hardware Requirements

System and Hardware RequirementsThe specific system resources necessary to run CAESAR II are listed below:

Minimum Average Preferred

Pentium 500 Mhz Dual Pentium 700 Mhz or

Pentium 1 Ghz

Pentium 2 Ghz

128 Mbytes of RAM 256 Mbytes of RAM 512 Mbytes of RAM

Windows 98 or later * Windows 98 or later * Windows 2000 or XP

100 Mbytes of Hard

Disk Space

2 Gbytes of Hard Disk

Space

2 Gbytes of Hard Disk

Space

8 Mbytes of Video

RAM

64 Mbytes of Video RAM 128 Mbytes of Video RAM

800 x 600 Video Res-

olution

1024 x 768 Video Reso-

lution

1280x1024 Video Resolu-

tion

Installation 2-3

Installation Menu Options CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Installation Menu OptionsEach of the Installation Menu options is discussed in detail in the following subsections.

CAESAR II Version 4.50

Selecting the CAESAR II Version 4.50 option begins the installation of the CAESAR II program. The installation procedure presents the user with a series of dialog boxes that request information or selections from the user.

The installation dialogs contain from two to three buttons at the bottom. These buttons are

• [Cancel]—terminates the installation of the software and returns control to the main installation menu

• [Next]— moves forward to the next dialog, and occasionally

• [Back]—moves backward to the previous dialog

Installation Process

As the installation begins, a dialog opens to suggest that all running applications be termi-nated. It is best if nothing else is running while the installation program runs. Most unsuc-cessful installation attempts can be attributed to other software running at the same time as the installation.

Clicking the Next button of the Welcome dialog produces a dialog prompting for the CD Serial Number.

2-4 Installation

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Installation Menu Options

The serial number can be found on the back of the jewel case. Note that the software can-not be installed without this serial number. Once the proper serial number has been speci-fied, the installation program reports the acceptance of the serial number and the type of installation about to take place.

Following the user’s acknowledgement of this dialog, the installation program prompts the user for the destination directory. This directory is the location to which the software will be installed. The dialog presented allows the user to navigate to different drives, either local or network, and to select directories. If the desired directory does not exist, it may be typed in manually in the edit box provided at the top of the dialog. By default, the installa-tion program assumes a destination directory the same as an existing version of the soft-ware.

Installation 2-5


Once the destination directory has been set, the next dialog prompts for the type of instal-lation. In almost all cases, the top button, for a full installation, should be selected. A full installation ensures the complete package is installed from the CD to the destination direc-tory, and any ancillary procedures are executed following the installation.

2-6 Installation


Note Notice in the dialog shown above that the [Next] button cannot be activated until an installation type is selected. Several of the dialogs work in this manner, to ensure all necessary information is obtained prior to the start of the actual file transfer.

Once this dialog is complete, the Language dialog is presented. This dialog allows the user to select from various languages, which then dictate the exact language resource files that will be installed.

Installation 2-7


After the desired language has been selected, the installation program prompts for the name of a program folder to organize the software components. This folder will (usually) be located on the “Start\Programs” menu of the task bar. Typically, the folder name should be the same as the software name, for ease of use.

2-8 Installation


After the program folder has been specified, the installation prompts for the type of ESL (External Software Lock). The ESL is the security device used to protect the software license. Various types of ESLs are supported by the software, each requiring their own device driver. This dialog enables the installation of the correct driver (assuming the user makes the correct selection).

Once the ESL type has been selected, the installation program presents the user with a dia-log summarizing all of the selections just made. This is the last dialog presented before the actual transfer of the files takes place.

Installation 2-9


After this dialog is accepted (by clicking on the [Next] button), the actual file transfer begins.

During the file transfer stage, the user is presented with an installation screen consisting of three panels.

2-10 Installation


The top panel contains information on other COADE products, registration information, and contact information. The bottom left panel is a status indicator, monitoring the progress of the installation. The bottom right panel is also a progress indicator, and addi-tionally lists the files as they are installed.

After all of the files have been successfully transferred, the installation program displays an information dialog, stating which ESL drivers have been installed. Note that, in order to run the software, the system must be rebooted so that the drivers are actually loaded. The installation program only sets the system up to load the drivers; it cannot actually load the drivers.

Installation 2-11


Checking the Installation

Once this dialog is accepted, the installation program runs a COADE diagnostic program, the CRC Check program. This program verifies that the program files have been success-fully transferred to the target directory without being corrupted. (Corruption could be caused by bad distribution media, a virus infection, or a bad spot on the hard disk.) For a successful installation, the status of all files should be reported as “OK,” and the error count should be reported as zero.

Note If the CRC check fails, this means a file was installed incorrectly. Try again to install the files or contact COADE for help.

Configuration

After the CRC Check program terminates, the installation program invokes the CAESAR II Configuration Program. This program creates the primary configuration file that resides in the program directory. It is this configuration that is used by default in all data directories, unless a local configuration file exists.

2-12 Installation


Note It is highly recommended that users familiarize themselves with the configuration directives. A full discussion of them can be found in the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual.

After the user completes the configuration phase, by clicking [Exit w/ Save], the installa-tion program displays the “Readme.Doc” file that accompanies the software. This file con-tains the program’s latest information, which may have missed the formal documentation. The file is displayed in WordPad, which is distributed as part of the Windows operating system.

After the user closes WordPad, the installation program prompts to see if the system should be rebooted.

Installation 2-13


Recall that some software components are not fully installed until the system is rebooted. Although you don’t have to reboot at this time, you may not be able to run the software until you do. Rebooting will finish the installation and leave control on the desktop as usual. Avoiding the reboot terminates the installation program and returns to the main installation menu.

Exiting from this menu returns control to the desktop, where the program folder can be seen.

This folder shows icons for starting the program, uninstalling the program, and reviewing notes on the program.

2-14 Installation


Browse CD ROM

This option invokes Windows Explorer using the CD as the initial target. This results in a typical “folder view” in Explorer.

Users can review the entire CD-ROM contents from this folder. This browser option is particularly useful when it is necessary to copy information files and demos from the CD. Notice in the figure above the reference to the file “ReadMe.txt.” It is always a good habit to review this file for additional instructions, advice, or late breaking changes.

ODBC Drivers

This option is selected to install drivers for CAESAR II’s ODBC interface. For informa-tion on using ODBC in CAESAR II, see Chapter 8 of the Technical Reference Manual.

Installation 2-15


Product Demos

This option presents another menu.

The list of options on this menu allows the review of the demos of all other COADE prod-ucts. Depending on the demo, this could be a simple slide show, or a restricted working demo. In the figure above, the tool-tip detail describes the first option (where the cursor is located). The [Back] button of this menu returns control to the Main Installation Menu.

Internet Explorer

This option invokes the installation procedure for Internet Explorer (IE). The presence of IE is required for the proper operation of the HTML Help Facility, which is the preferred help system implementation recommended by Microsoft. Although not all COADE prod-ucts currently implement HTML Help, most products are headed in this direction.

In addition, a browser (either IE or Netscape Communicator) is necessary to access the World Wide Web. The Web, and corporate web sites (such as COADE’s site at www.coade.com), are an excellent source of additional information on software products, support issues, and software updates. It has become almost critical that users be able to access vendor web sites in order to stay current with their software tools.

2-16 Installation


ESL Drivers

This option initiates the installation of the proper drivers for the ESL (External Software Lock). A series of dialogs is presented, similar to those presented for the installation of CAESAR II. This installation prompts for the ESL type.

The ESL is the security protection method employed by COADE. The CAESAR II pro-gram cannot execute unless an appropriate ESL is attached to the PC locally, or to another computer in the network (red ESL).

The ESL can be easily attached to the parallel port of the computer in a matter of seconds. The printer cable should then be attached to the other side of the ESL. The essential requirement for the successful operation of the ESL is that the port must be a Centronics compatible DB-25 pin parallel port. This is the IBM PC standard read/write printer port. Alternatively a USB ESL may be requested from COADE.

The ESL contains the CAESAR II licensing data, and other client-specific information. This information includes the client company name and user ID number. Additional data may be stored on the ESL depending on the specific program and the specific client.

This ESL driver installation installs the latest drivers, and properly addresses Windows 95 through Windows XP.

Installation 2-17


Contact Information

This option displays additional information on the CD image.

This information includes all current contact information for COADE. In addition, the ref-erence to the COADE website is an active link. Clicking on this link will invoke your pri-mary browser and present the COADE website.

2-18 Installation


Product Information

This option lists, on the CD image, all of the contents of the CD.

Notice that there are several items on the CD for which there is no direct installation method available from the menus. These items (Adobe Acrobat Reader, MS Word Viewer, and the COADE product brochures) can be installed or viewed using Windows Explorer. The Adobe Acrobat Reader is required in order to access the online documentation pro-vided with the software.

Exit

This option terminates the installation program and returns control to the operating sys-tem.

Installation 2-19

ESL Installation on a Network CAESAR II - User’s Guide

ESL Installation on a NetworkCOADE software programs support two different ESLs, “local” ESLs and “network” ESLs. Both types of ESLs are intended to be attached to the parallel ports of the applicable computers. The local ESLs provide the maximum flexibility in using the software, since these devices can be moved between computers (i.e., between desktops and laptops). If your computer uses a local ESL, the remainder of this section can be skipped.

The network ESL must be attached to the parallel port of any machine on the network (this can be a workstation or the file server). The file server is a better location for this ESL, since it will usually be up and running. If the network ESL is attached to a workstation, the workstation must be running and/or logged onto the network before anyone can use the software.

In order for the network to recognize the ESL, a utility program must be loaded on the machine controlling the ESL. The actual utility used depends on whether the ESL is on the file server or a workstation and the type of network. The drivers for network ESL usage can be found in the sub-directory ASSIDRV beneath the CAESAR II program directory. The documentation files in this sub-directory contain instructions for a variety of networks and operating systems.

Novell File Server ESL Installation

If the network ESL is to be located on a Novell file server, the driver HASPSERV.NLM is needed. This driver should be copied onto the file server, into the top level SYSTEM directory. Then, the system startup file (AUTOEXEC.NCF) should be modified to include the command LOAD HASPSERV.

This modification can be accomplished with SYSCON (or equivalent) assuming Supervi-sor rights.

Novell Workstation ESL Installation

If the network ESL is to be located on a workstation, the driver HASPSERV.EXE is needed. This driver should be copied onto the workstation. The actual location (directory) on the workstation is not important, as long as the program can be located for startup. Place the command, HASPSERV, in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file of the workstation, after the commands which load the network drivers. The workstation does not need to be logged in. Note, however, the workstation must always be up and running for users to access the software.

Windows server Installation

For a Windows server installation, refer to the documentation files NETHASP.TXT and ESL_RED.TXT found in the ASSIDRV subdirectory for network specific instructions.

2-20 Installation

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Notes on Network ESLs

Notes on Network ESLsThere are advantages and disadvantages in utilizing a network ESL. The prime advantage is that many users (up to the number of licenses) have access (from a variety of computers) to the software on a single server.

The prime disadvantage is that users cannot transfer the ESL between machines in order to take CAESAR II home or to another remote location.

Since both a network and several local ESLs may be initialized on the same system (there is no network-specific version of the software), it is suggested that only 70 to 80 percent of the desired licenses be assigned to a network ESL. The remaining 20 to 30 percent of the licenses should be assigned to local ESLs. This enables the local ESLs to be moved between computers, to run the software at remote locations. Alternatively, if all of the licenses are on the network ESL, a user must then be logged into the network to access the software. A few local ESLs provide much greater operating flexibility.

Note The number of licenses assigned to a network ESL is not a parameter that can be modified remotely by COADE software.

Installation 2-21

Re-Enabling the AutoRun Feature CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Re-Enabling the AutoRun FeatureFailure of the AutoRun feature is likely a result of the operator’s having turned off the AutoRun feature of the operating system. To turn this capability back on (under Windows 95/98), perform the following steps:

1. Right-click on My Computer and select Properties.

2. Choose the Device Manager tab.

3. Open the CD-ROM branch, and select the entry for your CD-ROM drive.

4. Click Properties, and choose the Settings tab.

5. On this dialog, ensure that the “Auto Insert Notification” option is turned on (checked).

6. Click [OK] then [OK] again.

7. Restart Windows for the changes to take effect. Your CDs should now start automati-cally.

Under Windows NT, you must manually alter a registry setting to change this behavior. Start the Registry Editor and navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\Current-ControlSet\Services\CDRom. To enable AutoRun, set the value of this key to 1.

2-22 Installation

�� ,:)��.�%��;��$ ��

��%��((�:)��.�%�� ;��$ �� &�� ( )�� &��.��8�� +4��;)� �� ++��<��)��%�� +��%��$) )��'��0 ��+!

�� '��+=�� )�0� �� =�� *

CAESAR II Quick Start CAESAR II - User’s Guide

CAESAR II Quick StartThis chapter explains the basics of CAESAR II operation, to enable users to quickly per-form a static piping analysis. All necessary user operations are discussed; however, details have been kept to a minimum. Each topic includes references to other sections of the CAESAR II User’s Guide for additional detailed information.

Use of the CAESAR II program assumes that the software has been installed as per the instructions detailed in Chapter 2.

There are several steps required to perform a static analysis. The major steps (and the chapters in which they are described) are listed below. These steps are explained briefly in this chapter.

• START CAESAR II (Chapter 4)

• GENERATE INPUT (Chapter 5)

• PERFORM ERROR CHECKING (Chapter 6)

• BUILD LOAD CASES (Chapter 6)

• EXECUTE STATIC ANALYSIS (Chapter 6)

• REVIEW OUTPUT (Chapter 7)

Note A complete CAESAR II tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.

Starting CAESAR II

CAESAR II may be started by double-clicking the CAESAR II icon, which should point to the program C2.EXE in the CAESAR II installation directory. (Note that invoking any of the other executable programs in the CAESAR II installation directory can result in unpredictable behavior.) At this point the Main Menu is loaded. It is from the Main Menu that the user selects jobs, analysis types, invokes execution, and initiates output review. The options of the Main Menu are fully described in Chapter 4 of this document—for the purposes of this “Quick Start” chapter, only the File, Input, Analysis, and Output menus are used.

Main Menu

All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes—subsequent input, analysis, or output review references the job name specified. The job name is selected using the File menu, using one of three methods.

3-2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

CAESAR II - User’s Guide CAESAR II Quick Start

Whenever the user wishes to begin a new job, selecting File-New (or clicking the New icon from the toolbar) invites the user to enter a job name and data directory. For the pur-poses of this Quick Start example, the user should enter a name, select Piping Input, and select an alternate directory for the file, if desired.

Note Selecting File-Open (or clicking the Open icon on the toolbar) presents the user with a dialog to select an existing file. Recently used files may also be selected from the Recent Piping/Structural File option on the File menu.

Note Enabling Structural Input opens the Structural Steel Wizard. See Chapter 4 of the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for more information.

New Job Name Dialog

Quick Start and Basic Operation 3-3

CAESAR II Quick Start CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Selecting a job name does not open the file; as noted, it simply indicates the job on which input modeling, analysis, output review, or other operations will be done. The user must still select one of these operations from the menu.

Open Dialog

CAESAR II now allows users the option to archive input files. Simply, enter a password between 6 and 24 characters in length. You will be prompted to repeat this information to eliminate the possibility of incorrectly entering the password. Archived input files cannot be altered and/or saved without this password however, they can be opened and reviewed.

Archive Password Dialog


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Basic Operation

Basic OperationOnce you have started the program and opened the file, you will choose the required oper-ation.

Piping Input Generation

Once the desired job name has been specified, the user can invoke the interactive model builder by selecting the Input-Piping entry of the Main Menu.

The input generation of the model consists of describing the piping elements, as well as any external influences (boundary conditions or loads) acting on those elements. Each pipe element is identified by two node numbers, and requires the specification of geomet-ric, cross sectional, and material data. The preferred method of data entry is the piping spreadsheet.

Piping Input Spreadsheet

Each pipe element is described on its own spreadsheet. Data which is likely to be carried forward is automatically duplicated by the program to subsequent spreadsheets. This means that for many elements, the user must only confirm the numbers and enter the delta-dimensions. When necessary, point specific data can easily be entered on the appropriate element’s spreadsheet.


Basic Operation CAESAR II - User’s Guide

The menus, toolbars, and accelerators offer a number of additional commands that the user can invoke to enter auxiliary processors or use special modelers or databases. These com-mands and general input instructions of the piping spreadsheet are discussed in detail in Chapter 5.

To Enter the first element (element 10-20) of a simple model, do the following:

1. Enter the value 10-0 (10 ft) in the DX field.

2. Enter the value 8 (8-in. nominal) in the Diameter field. This is automatically con-verted to actual diameter.

3. Enter the letter “S” (standard schedule pipe wall) in the Wt/Sch field. This is automat-ically converted to wall thickness.

4. Enter 600 (degrees Fahrenheit) in the Temp 1 field.

5. Enter 150 (psig) in the Pressure 1 field.

6. Double-click on the Bend checkbox. This adds a long radius bend at the end of the element, and adds intermediate nodes 18 and 19 at the near weld and mid points of the bend respectively (node 20 physically represents the far weld point of the bend).



7. Double-click on the Restraint checkbox. This brings up a Restraint auxiliary screen. On the first Node field, enter 10; then select ANC from the first Type drop list.

Bend Data



8. Select A106 B from the Material drop list. This selection fills in the material parame-ters such as density and modulus elasticity.

9. Double-click on the Allowable stress checkbox and select the B31.3 code from the Code drop list.

Note Allowable stresses for the given material, temperature, and code are displayed automatically.

10. Enter 0.85SG (0.85 specific gravity) in the Fluid Density field. This value is automat-ically converted to density.

11. To enter the second element of the model, press Alt-C, or the Continue toolbar, or use the Edit-Continue menu command to get a spreadsheet for a new element, element 20-30.

Restraint Settings



Note Node numbers are automatically generated and distributed, data is carried forward on new spreadsheets.

12. Enter the value 10-0 (10 feet) in the DY field.

13. Double-click on the Restraint checkbox. On the first Node field, enter 30; then select ANC from the first Type drop list.

The two element model (an ell-configuration anchored at each end) is now complete.

The piping preprocessor also provides interactive graphics and listing functions to facili-tate model editing and verification. The CAESAR II piping preprocessor is designed to make these tasks intuitive and efficient. Model verification can be performed using either the Graphics or List utilities, although a combination of both modes is recommended. The Graphics and List utilities are discussed in Chapter 5 of this manual. A typical CAESAR II graphics screen can be displayed with the Plot menu command or toolbar.

CAESAR II Input Graphics Screen



Once the model is completed, the job can be analyzed by exiting the piping preprocessor and starting error checking. This can be done using the File-Start Run menu option, the Start Run toolbar, or the Start Run option from the Quit Menu (invoked upon closing the input processor with the [Esc] key).

Note The options of the Quit Menu which save the user specified input data are: Start Run, Batch Run, and Exit and Save. Exit and Forget and Return to Edit do not save the data.

The preferred method for leaving the input preprocessor is via option Start Run. This option saves the data file and invokes the Piping Error Checker. The Batch Run option saves the data, invokes the error checker, and then continues with the analysis, all without user interaction.

Error Checking the Model

The Piping Error Checker is started automatically by the input module. There are two main functions of this error checker; first to verify the user’s input data, and second to build the execution data files utilized by the remainder of the CAESAR II program.

The verification of the user’s input data consists of checking each individual piping ele-ment for consistency. Errors discovered which would prevent CAESAR II from running (such as a corrosion allowance greater than the wall thickness) are flagged as fatal errors to the user.

Unusual items (such as a change of direction without a bend or intersection) are flagged as warnings to the user.

Other messages, of an informational type, may show intermediate calculations or general notes.

Piping Preprocessor Quit Menu



Each message may be accepted by pressing OK. If there is an error, the user can return to the input module by clicking the Return to Input toolbar.

If the error check process completes without fatal errors, a center of gravity report is pre-sented and the analysis data files can be generated and the solution phase can commence. Upon successful completion of the error checking routines, the user is, by default, returned to the main CAESAR II menu.

Center of Gravity Report

If fatal errors do exist, the analysis data files are not generated and the solution phase can-not be started. The user is then, by default, returned to the piping input module for correc-tions.

Building the Load Cases

A static analysis can be started from the Main Menu once the analysis data files have been generated by the error checker. The first stage of a static analysis is the setup of the load cases. For new jobs (no previous solution files available), the static analysis module rec-ommends load cases to the user based on the load types encountered in the input file. These recommended load cases are usually sufficient to satisfy the piping code require-ments for the Sustained and Expansion load cases. (If the recommended load cases are not satisfactory, the user always has the option of directly modifying them.)

The Load Case Builder is invoked by selecting the Analysis-Statics option of the Main Menu.



Load Case Builder

Loads can be built in two ways—by 1) combining the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements, thermal cases, etc.) into load cases (basic cases), and 2) combining load cases themselves into new load cases (combination cases).

The basic cases can be built by selecting (one or more), dragging, and dropping load com-ponents from the Loads Defined in Input list (in the left hand column) to the Load List on the right. Stress types (indicating which code equations should be used to calculate and check the stresses) can be selected from the drop list on each line.

Combination cases, if present, must always follow the basic cases. They can be built by selecting (one or more), dragging, and dropping basic load cases from earlier in the load list to combination cases (or blank load cases) later in the load list.

Note Load cases may also be built by simply typing on any of the individual lines.



Executing Static Analysis

Once the load cases have been defined, the user begins the actual finite element solution through the use of the File-Analyze command on the toolbar. The solution phase com-mences with the generation of the element stiffness matrices and load vectors, and solves for displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. This solution phase also performs the design and selection of spring hangers, and iterative stiffness matrix modifi-cations for nonlinear restraints. The user is kept apprised of the solution status throughout the calculation.



Static Output Review

A review of the static analysis results is possible immediately after a static solution, or at a later time by selecting the Output-Static option of the CAESAR II Main Menu. The static output processor presents the user with an interactive selection menu from which load cases and report options can be selected.

Results can be reviewed by selecting one or more load cases along with one or more reports (selection is done by clicking, ctrl-clicking, and shift-clicking the mouse). The results can be reviewed on the terminal, printed, or sent to a file, by using the View Reports, MS Word, File-Save/SaveAs, or File-Print menu commands and/or toolbars.

The user can also use the View-Plot menu command or the Plot toolbar to review the ana-lytic results in graphics mode, which can produce displaced shapes, stress distributions, and restraint actions.



Output Graphics Screen

The actual study of the results depends on the purpose of each load case, and the reason for the analysis. Usually the review checks that the system stresses are below their allow-ables, restraint loads are acceptable, and displacements are not excessive. Additional post processing (such as equipment, nozzle, and structural steel checks) may be required depending on the model and type of analysis.

Once the review of the output is finished, the user can return to the main CAESAR II menu by exiting the output review module.


�� !,8��8�)

��%��((�8��8�)�� 1� ��8�)�� ( )�8�) �� &�� 8�) �� 2$) )�8�) �� >�� 8�) �� ?"��8�)�� 3�%��8�)�� +4#� �8�) �� ++

�� 0� ��8��8�)*

The CAESAR II Main Menu CAESAR II - User’s Guide

The CAESAR II Main Menu

CAESAR II Main Menu

CAESAR II may be started by double clicking the CAESAR II icon, or by running C2.EXE from the CAESAR II installation directory.

Upon starting CAESAR II the Main Menu appears. It is recommended that this screen be kept at its minimal size (as shown above). This allows access to the toolbar while freeing most of the screen for other applications.

The Main Menu is used to direct the actions of the CAESAR II program. As elsewhere in the CAESAR II program, commands may be accessed from menus, as well as toolbars and/or key stroke combinations in many cases. The available menu options are briefly described here with further detail available elsewhere in this document or in the CAESAR II Technical Reference Guide.

4-2 Main Menu

CAESAR II - User’s Guide File Menu

File Menu

The File menu may be used to do the following:

• Set Default Data Directory—Set the default data (project) directory without selecting a specific job file. Some CAESAR II options do not require that a job be selected, but must know in which directory to work.

Note The selection of the data directory is very important since any configuration, units, or other data files found in that directory are considered to be “local” to that job.

• New—Start a new piping or structural job.

When New is selected the user must designate whether this job is for a piping or structural model. The data directory where the file is to be placed must be selected, either by enter-ing it directly or by browsing.

Note Selecting Structural Input invokes the Structural Steel Wizard. For more informa-tion, see Chapter 4 of the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for details.

File New Dialog

File Menu

Main Menu 4-3

File Menu CAESAR II - User’s Guide

• Open—Open an existing piping or structural job.

When the Open option is chosen the user is prompted to select an existing job file. Files of type “Piping,” “Pre-version 3.24 piping,” or “Structural” may be displayed for selection (see below).

File Open Dialog

• Clean Up (delete) Files—Use this directive to delete unwanted scratch files, listing files, input, and output files to retain more hard disk space.

File Clean Up Dialog

• Recent Files list—The four most recently used files are displayed in the file menu and when selected they are opened just as if chosen using the File-Open command.

• Exit—Exit CAESAR II.

4-4 Main Menu

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Input Menu

Input Menu

Input Menu

Once a file is selected, the Input Menu indicates the available modules for the file type chosen.

• Piping—Input a CAESAR II piping model (see Chapter 5).

• Underground—Convert existing piping model to buried pipe (see Chapter 11).

• Structural Steel—Input a CAESAR II structural model (see Chapter 10).

Main Menu 4-5

Analysis Menu CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Analysis Menu

Analysis Menu

The Analysis Menu allows the user to select from the different calculations available.

• Statics—Static analysis of pipe and/or structure. This is available after error checking the input file (see Chapter 6).

• Dynamics—Dynamic analysis of pipe and/or structure. This is also available after error checking the input file (see Chapter 8).

• SIFs—Scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at intersections and bends.

• WRC 107/297—Calculate stresses in vessels due to attached piping (see Chapter 12).

• Flanges—Perform flange stress and leakage calculations (Chapter 12).

• B31.G—Estimate pipeline remaining life (Chapter 12).

• Expansion Joint Rating—Evaluate expansion joints using EJMA equations (Chapter 12).

• AISC—Perform AISC code check on structural steel elements (Chapter 12).

• NEMA SM23—Evaluate piping loads on steam turbine nozzles (Chapter 12).

• API 610—Evaluate piping loads on centrifugal pumps (Chapter 12).

• API 617—Evaluate piping loads on compressors (Chapter 12).

• API 661—Evaluate piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers (Chapter 12).

• HEI Standard—Evaluate piping loads on feedwater heaters (Chapter 12).

• API 560—Evaluate piping loads on fired heaters (Chapter 12).

4-6 Main Menu

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Output Menu

Output Menu

Output Menu

The user is presented with all available output of piping and/or structural calculations, which may be selected for review.

• Static—Static results (see Chapter 7).

• Harmonic—Results of harmonic loading (see Chapter 9).

• Spectrum Modal—Results of natural frequency/mode shape calculations or uniform/force spectrum loading (see Chapter 9).

• Time History—Results of time history load simulations (see Chapter 9).

• Animation—Animated graphic simulation of any of the above results.

Main Menu 4-7

Tools Menu CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Tools Menu

Tools Menu

The Tools Menu includes various CAESAR II supporting utilities that are used for

• Configure/Setup—Customizes the behavior of CAESAR II, on a directory by direc-tory basis. This enables the user to consider items such as treatment of corrosion, pres-sure stiffening, etc. differently for each directory, due to project or client considerations.

• Calculator—Brings up an on-screen calculator.

• Make Units files—Creates custom sets of units.

• Material Data Base—Edits or adds to the CAESAR II material data base.

• Accounting—Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports.

• Multi-Job Analysis—Lets the user run a stream of jobs without operator intervention.

• Convert Units—Converts existing CAESAR II files to a different set of units.

• External Interfaces—CAESAR II offers many interfaces to and from third party soft-ware (both CAD and analytical).

4-8 Main Menu

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Diagnostics Menu

Diagnostics Menu

Diagnostics Menu

Diagnostics are provided to help trouble shoot problem installations (See above).

• CRC Check—Verifies that program files are not corrupted.

• Build Version—Determines the build version of CAESAR II files.

• Error Review—Reviews description of CAESAR II errors.

• DLL Version Check—Provides version information on library files used by CAESAR II.

Main Menu 4-9

ESL Menu CAESAR II - User’s Guide

ESL Menu

ESL Menu

The ESL Menu gives access to utilities which interact with the External Software Lock.

• Show Data—Displays data stored on the ESL.

• Phone Update—Allows runs to be added, or other ESL changes, to be made over the phone.

• Generate Access Codes—Allows runs to be added, or other ESL changes, to be made either through Fax or E-mail (in conjunction with option below).

• Enter re-authorization Codes—(see option above).

• Check HASP Device Status—Verifies the location and version of the ESL.

• Install HASP Device Driver—Installs the ESL Drivers.

4-10 Main Menu

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Help Menu

Help Menu

Help Menu

• Tip of the Day—Provides tips for running CAESAR II.

• On-Line Documentation—CAESAR II— Displays CAESAR II documentation in either HTML or PDF format.

• Animated Tutorials—Displays a list of viewlets that answer some commonly asked questions.

• Desktop On-Line Help— Launches COADE’s online technical support.

• On-Line Registration— For users with internet connections a form is available, which will be sent electronically to COADE after clicking the Send button.

Main Menu 4-11

Help Menu CAESAR II - User’s Guide

• Information—Provides information on the best ways to contact COADE personnel for technical support and provides internet links for COADE downloads and information..

• About CAESAR II—Displays copyright and other information on CAESAR II.

4-12 Main Menu

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Help Menu

Context-sensitive, on-screen help is available anywhere in the program by pressing ? or [F1] while the cursor is on any input field. A help screen showing the required units and providing a short discussion of what is expected appears.

Help Dialog

Note Throughout the CAESAR II program, context-sensitive help (including the units requested, where applicable) is available by pressing [F1] on any field.

Main Menu 4-13

Help Menu CAESAR II - User’s Guide

4-14 Main Menu

�� &,�� ( )

��% ��$'��'��0�� "��1�� )<� ��"�� 38�)�� "�8�� 2

�� 0��)��0�� *

Spreadsheet Overview CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Spreadsheet OverviewIn order to input a piping model, one must either open a new or existing piping file from the Main Menu, and then choose Input-Piping. The CAESAR II piping input spread-sheet then appears.

Input Spreadsheet

This spreadsheet is used to describe the piping on an element by element basis. It consists of menu commands/toolbars which can be used to perform a number of supporting opera-tions and data fields used to enter information about each piping element.

Undo/Redo

Any modeling steps done in the CAESAR II input module may be "undone", one at a

time, using the Undo command, activated by the button on the toolbar, the Edit-

Undo menu option, or the Ctrl-Z hot key. Likewise, any "undone" steps may be "redone"

sequentially, using the Redo command, activated by the button on the toolbar, the Edit-Redo menu option, or the Ctrl-Y hot key. An unlimited number of steps (limited only by amount of available memory) may be undone. Note that making any input change while in the middle of the "undo stack" of course resets the "redo" stack.

5-2 Piping Input

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Data Fields

Customize Toolbar

CAESAR II enables the user to customize Spreadsheet and 3D Graphic toolbars. You can determine which buttons display and their locations, by right-clicking the mouse on the toolbar, causing the following dialog to appear.

Customize Toolbar

Alternatively, users can customize the toolbar by pressing the <Shift> key, clicking a but-ton and dragging it to the new position. CAESAR II allows users to undo any changes by right-clicking on the toolbar, which causes the Customize Toolbar dialog to appear, and clicking the Reset button.

Data FieldsThe data fields are grouped logically into blocks of related data on the left side of the screen. The right side of the screen offers an auxiliary area, with changing data-fields that support items entered through check boxes (pressing [F12] alternatively displays the vari-ous auxiliary screens). The following are the data-field blocks:

Node Numbers

Each element is identified by its end “node” numbers. Since each input screen represents a piping element, the element end points - the From node and To node - must be entered. These points are used as locations at which information may be entered or extracted. The From node and To node are both required data.

Note CAESAR II can generate both values if the AUTO_NODE_INCREMENT direc-tive is set to other than zero using the Tools-Configure/Setup option of the Main Menu.

Piping Input 5-3

Data Fields CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Element Lengths

Lengths of the elements are entered as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, Z rectangu-lar coordinate system established for the piping system (note that the Y-axis represents the vertical axis). The delta dimensions DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z axes between the From node and To node. In most cases only one of the three cells will be used as the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the piping ele-ment is skewed two or three entries must be made. One or more entries must be made for all elements except “zero length” expansion joints.

Note When using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid entries in this (and most other length fields) include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.

Offsets can be used to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the orientation of its neutral axis in 3-D space.

Element Direction Cosines

Clicking the Ellipsis (...) button to the right of the element lengths (DX, DY, DZ) displays the Element dialog. The Element dialog displays the total Length and Direction Cosines. Changes made to the total element Length, or Direction Cosines may affect one or all of the element lengths (DX, DY, DZ). Changes made to any of the element lengths (DX, DY, DZ) will affect both the total element Length and Direction Cosines.

5-4 Piping Input


Pipe Section Properties

The element’s outside diameter, wall thickness, mill tolerance (plus mill tolerance is used for IGE/TD/12 piping code only), seam weld (IGE/TD/12 piping code only), corrosion allowance, and insulation thickness are entered in this block. These data carry forward from one screen to the next during the input session and need only be entered for those ele-ments at which a change occurs. Nominal pipe sizes and schedules may be specified; CAESAR II converts these values to actual outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside diameter and wall thickness are required data.

Note Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe size specification. ANSI, JIS, or DIN are set via the Tools-Configure/Setup option of the Main Menu.

Operating Conditions: Temperatures and Pressures

Piping Input 5-5


Up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test pressure) can be specified for each piping element. (The button with the ellipses dots is used to activate a window showing extended operating conditions input). The temperatures are actual tem-peratures (not changes from ambient). CAESAR II uses these temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and allowable stresses for the element from the material data base. As an alternative, the thermal strains may be specified directly (see the discussion of ALPHA TOLERANCE in the Technical Reference Manual). Thermal strains have absolute val-ues on the order of 0.002, and are unitless. Pressures are entered as gauge values and may not be negative. Each temperature and each pressure entered creates a loading for use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure data carries forward from one ele-ment to the next until changed. Entering a value in the Hydro Pressure field causes CAESAR II to build a Hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.

Note CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70°F, unless changed using the Spe-cial Execution Parameters Option.

Special Element Information

Special components such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints and tees require addi-tional information which can be defined in this block.

If the element described by the spreadsheet ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint, the Bend checkbox should be set by double-clicking. This entry opens up the auxiliary data field on the right hand side of the input screen to accept additional data regarding the bend. CAESAR II usually assigns three nodes to a bend (giving ‘near’, ‘mid’, and ‘far’ node on the bend).

Double-clicking on the Rigid checkbox (indicating an element that is much stiffer than the connecting pipe such as a flange or valve), opens an auxiliary data field to collect the com-ponent weight. For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:

• When the rigid element weight is entered, i.e. not zero, CAESAR II computes any extra weight due to insulation and contained fluid, and adds it to the user’s entered weight value.

• The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of insula-tion added is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe times 1.75.

• If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes the element is an artificial “construction element” rather than an actual piping element, so no insula-tion or fluid weight is computed for that element.

• The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter (and wall & thickness) entered. Make sure that the diameter entered on a rigid element spreadsheet is indica-tive of the rigid stiffness that should be generated.

5-6 Piping Input


If an element is an expansion joint, double-clicking that checkbox brings up an auxiliary screen which prompts for stiffness parameters and effective diameter. Expansion joints may be modeled as zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a single point) or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In the former case, all stiff-nesses must be entered, in the latter, either the lateral or angular stiffness must be omitted.

Checking the SIF & Tees checkbox allows the user to specify any component having spe-cial stress intensification factors (SIF). CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component.

Note Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. Refer to the valve/flange and expansion joint data base discussions later in this chapter for quick entry of rigid element and expansion joint data.

Boundary Conditions

The checkboxes in this block open the auxiliary data field to allow the input of items which restrain (or impose movement on) the pipe— restraints, hangers, flexible nozzles or displacements. Though not required, it is recommended that such information be supplied on the input screen which has that point as the From node or To node. (This will be of benefit if the data must be located for modification). The auxiliary data fields allow speci-fication of up to 4 restraints (devices which in some way modify the free motion of the system), one hanger, one nozzle, or two sets of nodal displacements per element. If needed, additional items for any node can be input on other element screens.

Loading Conditions

The checkboxes in this block allow the user to define loadings acting on the pipe. These loads may be individual forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform loads (which may be specified on force per unit length, or gravitational body forces), or wind loadings (wind loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factor—the loads themselves are specified when building the load cases.

The uniform load and the wind shape factor check boxes will be unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were removed from these elements, instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent screens.

Note Uniform loads may be specified in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special Execution Options.

Piping Input 5-7


Piping Material

CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe material’s elastic modulus, Poisson’s ratio, density, and (in most cases) expansion coefficient. The program provides a database containing the parameters for many common piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a material from the drop list, by entering the material number, or by typing any or all of the material name and then picking it from the match list. (The coeffi-cient of expansion does not appear on the input screen, but it can be reviewed during error checking.) Note that materials 18 and 19 represent cold spring properties, cut short and cut long respectively; material 20 activates CAESAR II’s orthotropic model for use with materials such as fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. Material 21 permits a totally user defined material. Using a material with a number greater than 100 permits the use of allowable stresses from the database.

Material Elastic Properties

This block is used to enter or override the elastic modulus and Poisson’s ratio of the mate-rial, if the value in the database is not correct. These values must be entered for Material type 21 (user specified).

Note Material properties in the database may be changed permanently using the CAESAR II material database editor.

Densities

The densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents are specified in this block. The piping material density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the material data base. Fluid density can optionally be entered in terms of specific gravity, if

5-8 Piping Input

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Auxiliary Data Area

convenient, by following the input immediately with the letters: SG, e.g. 0.85SG (there can be no spaces between the number and the SG).

Note If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no insulation density is entered, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium sili-cate.

Auxiliary Data AreaThe Auxiliary data area is used to display or enter extended data associated with the check box fields.

The data in this area can be displayed by single clicking the appropriate box, or by tog-gling through the screens with the use of the [F12] key.

Note When there is no auxiliary data, an input status screen appears.

Bend Data

This auxiliary screen is used to enter information regarding bend radius, miter cuts, fitting wall thickness, stiffness factor (K-Factor), or attached flanges.

Intermediate node points may be placed at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend mid-point (“M”).

Piping Input 5-9

Auxiliary Data Area CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Rigid Weight

This auxiliary screen is used to enter the weight of a rigid element. If no weight is entered CAESAR II models the element as a weightless construction element.

Note Rigid weights are entered automatically if the Valve and Flange database is used.

Expansion Joint

This auxiliary screen is used to enter the expansion joint stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For a non-zero length expansion joint, either the transverse or bending stiffness must be omitted.

Note Setting the effective diameter to zero de-activates the pressure thrust load. This method may be used (in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness) to simu-late the effect of axial tie-rods.

5-10 Piping Input


Restraints

This auxiliary screen is used to enter data up to four restraints per spreadsheet. Node num-ber and restraint Type are required, all other information is optional (omitting the stiffness entry defaults to “rigid”). Restraint types may be selected from the drop list or typed in.

Note Skewed restraints may be entered by entering direction cosines with the type, such as X (0.707,0.0,0.707) for a restraint running at 45o in the X-Z plane.

Piping Input 5-11


Displacements

This auxiliary screen is used to enter imposed displacements at up to two nodes per spreadsheet. Up to nine displacement vectors may be entered (load components D1 through D9). If a displacement value is entered for any vector, this direction is considered to be fixed for any other non-specified vectors.

Note Leaving a direction blank for all nine vectors models the system as being free to move in that direction. Specifying “0.0” implies that the system is fully restrained in that direction.

5-12 Piping Input


Forces

This auxiliary screen is used to enter imposed forces and/or moments at up to two nodes per spreadsheet. Up to nine force vectors may be entered (load components F1 through F9).

Uniform Loads

This auxiliary screen is used to enter up to three uniform load vectors (load components U1, U2 and U3). These uniform loads are applied to the entire current element, as well as

Piping Input 5-13


all subsequent elements in the model, until explicitly changed or zeroed out with a later entry.

Wind/Wave

This auxiliary screen is used to specify whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or wave loading. (Note that the pipe may not be exposed to both.) Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting Wave exposes the pipe to wave, current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading.

This screen is also used to enter the Wind Shape Factor (when Wind is specified) and vari-ous wave coefficients (if left blank they will be program-computed) when Wave Loading is specified.

Entries on this auxiliary screen apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later spreadsheet.

Note Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case Editor.

5-14 Piping Input


Allowable Stresses

This auxiliary screen is used to select the piping code (from a drop list) and to enter any data required for the code check. Allowable stresses are automatically updated for mate-rial, temperature and code if available in the material database.

Material Fatigue Curve data may be entered by clicking the Fatigue Curve button. A dia-log displays where users may enter stress vs. cycle data with up to 8 points per curve.

Piping Input 5-15


Note IGE/TD/12 requires the entry of five fatigue curves representing fatigue classes D,E,F,G, and W.

The Fatigue Curve data may also be read in from a COADE-supplied or user-created file. Access these file by clicking the Read from Files button on the Fatigue Curve dialog.

5-16 Piping Input


Piping Input 5-17


Stress Intensification Factors/Tees

This auxiliary screen is used to enter stress intensification factors, or fitting types at up to two nodes per spreadsheet. If components are selected from the drop list, CAESAR II automatically calculates the SIF values as per the applicable code (unless overridden by the user). Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data as shown. Fields are enabled as appropriate for the selected fitting.

5-18 Piping Input


Flexible Nozzles

This auxiliary screen is used to describe flexible nozzle connections. When entered in this way, CAESAR II automatically calculates the flexibilities and inserts them at this loca-tion. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads according to WRC 297, API 650 or BS 5500 criteria.

Piping Input 5-19


Hangers

This auxiliary screen is used to describe hanger installations. Hanger data may be fully completed by the user, or the hanger may be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run, the results of which are used as design parameters which are used to select the springs from the user specified catalog.

Note CAESAR II provides catalogs for 20 different spring hanger vendors.

5-20 Piping Input


Node Names

Activating this checkbox allows the user to enter text names for the From and/or To nodes (up to ten characters). These names display instead of the node numbers on the graphic plots and in the reports (note some of the names may be truncated when space is not avail-able).

Offsets

This auxiliary screen is used to specify offsets to correct modeled element length and ori-entation to actual length and orientation. Offsets may be specified at From and/or To nodes.

Piping Input 5-21

Menu Commands CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Menu CommandsCAESAR II piping input processor provides many commands which can be run from the menu, toolbars or accelerator keys. The menu options are:

File Menu

The File menu is used to perform actions associated with opening, closing and running the job file.

File Menu for the Piping Input Screen

5-22 Piping Input

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Menu Commands

• New—Creates a new CAESAR II job. CAESAR II prompts for the name of the new model.

• Open—Opens an existing CAESAR II job. CAESAR II prompts for the name

• Save—Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.

• Save As—Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.

• Archive—Allows the user to assign a password to prevent inadvert-ent alteration of the model or to enter the password to unlock the file.

• Start Run—Runs the job —i.e., sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis, followed by the building of the static or dynamic load cases (see Chapter 6).

• Batch Run—Performs a “Batch Run” (error checks the model in a non-interactive way and halts only for fatal errors uses the existing or default static load cases, and performs the static analysis). The next stop is the output processor.

• Print—Allows the user to print out an input listing. CAESAR II prompts the user for the data items to include.

• Print Preview—Provides print preview of input listing.

• Print Setup— Sets up the printer for the input listing.

• Recent File List— Open a file from the list of most recently used jobs.

New

Open

Save

Archive

Start Run

Batch Run

Piping Input 5-23


Edit Menu

Edit Menu for the Piping Input

The edit menu provides commands for cutting and pasting, navigating through the spread-sheets, and performing a few small utilities. These commands are:

• Continue—Moves the spreadsheet to the next element in the model, adding a new element if there is no next element.

• Insert—Inserts an element either before or after the current element.

Insert Element

Continue

Insert

5-24 Piping Input


• Delete—Deletes the current element.

• Find—Allows the user to find an element containing one or more named nodes (if two nodes are entered, the element must contain both nodes).

Find Element

• Global—Prompts the user to enter global (absolute) coordinates for the first node of any disconnected segments.

• Close Loop—Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes on the spreadsheet.

• Increment—Gives the user the opportunity to change the automatic node increment.

• Distance—Calculates the distance between the origin and a node, or between two nodes.

• List—Presents the input data in an alternative, list format. This pro-vides the benefit of showing all of the element data in a context set-ting. The list format also permits block operations such as Duplicate, Delete, Copy, Renumber on the element data. For more information on the list input format, see the Technical Reference Manual.

Delete

Find

Global

Close Loop

Increment

Distance

List

Piping Input 5-25


List Input Format

• [Pg Dn], [Pg Up], Ctrl +[Home], Ctrl +[End]—Allow the user to move throughout the elements of the model.

Note Unlike the Continue command, [Pg Dn] does not create a new element once the end of the model is reached.

Previous Element

5-26 Piping Input


Model Menu

The Model menu contains modeling aids, as well as means for entering associated, sys-tem-wide information.

Model Menu

• Break—Allows the user to break the element into two unequal length elements or into many equal length elements. A single node may be placed as a break point anywhere along the element, or multiple nodes may be placed at equal intervals (the node step interval between the From and To nodes determines the number of nodes placed).

Break Element

Piping Input 5-27


Note Restraint configurations may be automatically copied from any other node in the system to the new nodes.

• Valve—Allows the user to model a valve or flange from one of the CAESAR II data-bases. Choosing a combination of Rigid Type, End Type, and Class constructs a rigid element with the length and weight extracted from the database.

Valve and Flange Database

Note Selecting the FLG option in the CADWORX database adds the length and weight of two flanges (and two gaskets) onto the selected valve.

• Expansion Joints—Activates the Expansion Joint Modeler. This modeler automati-cally builds a complete assembly of the selected expansion joint style, using the bel-lows stiffnesses and rigid element weights extracted from one of the vendors’ expansion joint catalogues.

5-28 Piping Input


Expansion Joints

• Title—Allows the user to enter a job title up to sixty lines long.

Piping Input 5-29


Title

• Hanger Design Control Data—Prompts the user for system - wide hanger design cri-teria.

Hanger Design Control Data

5-30 Piping Input


Note System-wide hanger design criteria is used for all hanger designs, unless over-ruled at specific hanger locations.

Piping Input 5-31


Kaux Menu

The Kaux menu provides some miscellaneous items.

Kaux Menu

• Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes—Allows the user to run “what if” tests on the Stress Intensification Factors of intersections.

• Review SIFs at Bend Nodes—Allows the user to run “what if” tests on the Stress Intensification Factors of selected bends.

• Special Execution Parameters—Allows the user to set options affecting the analysis of the current job. Items covered include ambient temperature, pressure stiffening, dis-placements due to pressure (Bourdon effect), Z-axis orientation, etc.

5-32 Piping Input


Special Execution Parameters

Piping Input 5-33


• Include Piping Input Files—Allows the user to include other piping models in the current model.

Include Piping Files

The same file may be included more than once by highlighting it in the list, then changing the rotation angle (ROTY) or nodal increment (Inc) before clicking the ADD button.

5-34 Piping Input


• Include Structural Input Files—Allows the incorporation of structural models into the piping model.

Include Structural Files

• Show Informational Messages —Allows the user to specify whether or not you receive information messages when CAESAR II converts nominal diameter and thicknesses to actual diameter and thicknesses.

Piping Input 5-35

3-D Modeler CAESAR II - User’s Guide

3-D ModelerThis menu option provides two types of graphics—the traditional CAESAR II graphics, as well as CAESAR II’s new 3-D graphics library. When selected, these graphics will replace CAESAR II’s traditional graphics.

Start CAESAR II and invoke the Piping Input Processor. Once in the input, launch the 3D Graphics by clicking the corresponding plot button. The initial view for a job never plotted before is displayed according to the configuration defaults that include:

• a rendered view- restraints shown

• XYZ compass - isometric view

• tees and nozzles highlighted- orthographic projection

The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speedup the process. Then all the elements get changed to their intended state (they are rendered one by one). Later, the restraints and other relevant items are added.

Note The model is fully operational while actually being drawn. Users may apply any available option to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom of the view window displays the drawing progress in the form of Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete, the status bar message changes to Ready.

When the mouse cursor hovers over the buttons the button's name displays, and a short description of the button’s functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.

Plot

5-36 Piping Input

CAESAR II - User’s Guide 3-D Modeler

There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot Util-ity. Commands may be accessed by clicking the buttons, selecting drop-down menu items, or through the use of hot keys.

Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode, this often makes the view clearer, simply click the Centerline View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained by clicking the corresponding button. Alternatively, pressing the V key on the keyboard will switch the views in the following order: Gouraud Shading (rendered mode / Two Line Mode / Center Line View.

Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button, Front/Back/Top/Bottom/Left/Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally, holding down the SHIFT button while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen on a CAD drawing.

The transition from one orthogonal view to another is a smooth transition. It is possible to make a sudden change/jump by pressing a combination of the CTRL + ALT + F5 keys before changing the view with one of the described options. The sudden jump option is useful for relatively large models as it speeds up the viewing process.

Node numbers can be displayed by clicking the Node Numbers button or by pressing the N key on the keyboard. Alternatively, the same functionality may be achieved from the menu by clicking Options/Node Numbers.

The lengths of the elements can be displayed by clicking the Show Lengths button or by pressing the L key on the keyboard. Alternatively, the same functionality may be achieved from the menu by clicking Options/Lengths. This will display the elements lengths to ver-ify the input.

As an alternative, clicking the Select by Single Click button and hovering with the mouse about the model will produce a bubble with relevant information for a particular element for more information refer to the the Select by Single Click paragraph below.

Note For a clearer view, nodes, restraints, hangers, and anchors can be turned off. The boundary condition symbols (like restraints, anchors, and hangers} size is relative to the pipe size OD. In addition the symbol (i.e., restraints and/or hangers) size may be changed manually by clicking the black arrow to the right of the relevant button and selecting the size option from the drop down menu.

Users can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, etc. by clicking the Change Display Options button, for more information refer to the the 3D Graphics Configuration section below.

The model can be panned using the mouse, by activating the Pan button. After clicking the button, the cursor changes to a hand; and the view may be panned by moving the mouse while holding down the left mouse button. The view may also be panned from under any other command by holding down the middle mouse button/mouse wheel while moving the mouse (when applicable).

An isometric view can be obtained by clicking the ISO View button. This action may also be activated by pressing the F10 key on the keyboard.

Piping Input 5-37


All the highlighting and zoom/rotate effects on the model as well as other effects may be reset at once by clicking the Reset Plot button. The model returns to its default state as defined by the configuration; any elements hidden by the Range command are restored, for more information refer to the Range section for details.

• Zooming

The model can be zoomed by clicking the Zoom button, and moving the mouse up or down while depressing the left mouse button. Releasing the mouse button halts the zoom. Note that while in the zoom mode, the keyboard + and - keys may be used to zoom the model in and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from under any other com-mand or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best way to zoom to a particular area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band box around the desired area. Simply click the Zoom to Window button, then left-click one corner of the desired area, and stretch a box diagonally to the opposite corner of the area while still holding the left mouse button down. When the left button is released, the model zooms to the selected area. To see the entire model on the screen, click the Zoom to Extents button.

Alternatively, the right mouse button can be used to display a context menu, containing toggle switches for zooming, panning, and rotating the model. Once an option is enabled, mouse movement causes the model to respond in the selected manner. Note, to leave the selected manipulation mode, the toggle switch must be selected again, or the Esc key can be used.

• Rotation/Orbiting

Interactive rotation of the model can be accomplished by clicking the Orbit button. Once this mode is activated, the model can be rotated by using the mouse or the arrow keys on the keyboard. To use a mouse for rotating the model, click the left mouse button on the model (the bounding box will be drawn to outline the model boundaries; while holding down the left mouse button, move the mouse around to the desired position. When the mouse button is released, the view is updated and the bounding box disappeasr. If the bounding box is not visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration dialog for more information refer to the 3D Graphics Configuration section for details.

Note, during the rotation operation (only for speedup purposes the model may be changed to the centerline/ single line mode view or some of the geometry details may become miss-ing or distorted. The actual conversion will depend on the size and complexity of the model. Once the rotation is complete, the model returns to its original state.

Another method of orbiting the model is the Gyro operator. It can be activated by pressing the G keyboard key. After pressing the G key, the model performs a full 360 degree rota-tion in the plane of view.

3D Graphics Configuration

The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the model’s state between sessions. Exit-ing the input completely and then returning to the input graphics results in the model being displayed in the same state in which it was last viewed. The state of each model is main-tained individually (job related), in an XML data file (jobname.XML) in the current data directory. After launching another input session, CAESAR II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes the rotation and zoom level of the model; various color settings, data display, and the current graphics operator.

5-38 Piping Input


Most of the display options can be adjusted by clicking the Change Display Options button. The tabs of this dialog control include: basic graphics colors, font selection and size for textural data, user startup settings, and visibility (the degree of transparency.

• Basic Graphics Colors: Selecting any item in the list, then clicking Change, displays a Windows color selection tool. Selecting the desired color and clicking OK changes the color of the selected item to the new color. The rotating spring hanger is used to actively view the color selection combinations before altering the entire plot window. This is a useful tool to prevent selecting unsatisfactory color combinations. The colors may be set to the CAESAR II defaults (as defined in the configuration by clicking the Reset All button.

• Font Selection: Selecting any item in the list, then clicking Change, displays a stan-dard Windows font selection tool. Select a font face, a font style, a font point size, and optionally a font color. Clicking OK changes the font of the selected item to the new font. Similar to the Colors tab, the relative size, color, as well as the font face of the selected text item can be previewed in the Font Sample window of the Fonts tab before changing the entire model.

• The User Options tab is used to set the initial display configuration when first plotting a model in an input session. The 3D graphics can be configured (on an individual job basis to restart in a specific manner. The graphics can startup with a preset operator active (such as zoom with mouse, or startup with the last operator used still active. Likewise, the graphics can startup in a preset view (such as isometric, or in the last rotated zoomed position.

• The Bounding Box option determines if rotations, via the mouse, includes an outline box surrounding the model. The Hide Overlapped Text option prevents text from appearing on top of other text items producing a blob. The Default Projection option determines the initial projection style of the model. Orthographic projection is the CAESAR II graphics default. The Restore Last Operator option determines whether the graphics engine remembers your last action (operator between sessions, or always defaults to a specified action (operator on startup. Disabling the check box activates the operator selection radio buttons. Similarly, the Restore Previous View option determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed view of the model, or defaults to a specified view. Disabling the check box activates the initial view radio buttons.

• The Visibility tab is used to alter the degree of transparency, when translucent pipe is activated. When the Translucent Objects button is clicked, it allows viewing through the pipe. This is especially useful for viewing jacketed piping or piping inside of ves-sels. Moving the slider to the right increases the degree of visibility, making it easier to see through the pipe elements.

Note This option is only effective when viewing the model in rendered mode, and can be activated by clicking the Translucent Objects button.

• Markers: this tab is not used at this time.

Piping Input 5-39


Note Clicking the OK button of the Plot Configuration dialog will save the changes and modify the model view correspondingly. In contrast, clicking the Cancel button on the Plot Configuration dialog will disregard all the changes made.

HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations

Another feature of the HOOPS Graphics is the ability to adjust the graphics toolbar, for the purpose of rearranging or removing buttons. There are a number of ways to make these adjustments, as discussed here. The first method is to right click on the toolbar. This will bring up a Customize Toolbar button which activates the modification dialog box.

After clicking this Customization button, a dialog box is presented which allows for the removal or reordering of all buttons. Buttons can be removed by moving the selector in the right hand list box to the desired button, and clicking the Remove button. Removed items can be put back on the toolbar by selecting them in the left hand list box and clicking the Add button. Buttons can be reordered by selecting them (one at a time and then clicking the Move Up or Move Down buttons. To restore the CAESAR II default toolbar configura-tion, click the Reset button.

In addition to the use of this formal customization dialog, individual buttons can be removed or repositioned by holding down the SHIFT key, and dragging the desired button. To remove a button, drag it off the graphics window, using the left mouse button. To repo-sition a button, drag it to the desired location, using the left mouse button. When the mouse button is released, the button will be placed on the toolbar at the selected location.

• Multiple ViewPorts

The 3D/HOOPS Graphics module provides up to 4 views, which can be sized, rotated, and annotated individually by the user.

To gain control of the splitter handle, click the Four Views button. It automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers (splitter bars on the screen, and changes the mouse cur-sor to a four-way arrow icon. The user may change the position of the splitter bars (and correspondingly the relative size of the views by simply moving the mouse around. After finding the desired splitters location, click the left mouse button once to fix the position.

The vertical and horizontal splitter bars can also be dragged or resized individually: after-hovering the mouse to a splitter bar, the mouse cursor will change to vertical or horizontal resize correspondingly. For example, to change the position of the vertical split bar, using the left mouse button, grab the splitter bar and drag it to the right. When the mouse button is released, all the panes are updated. If the splitter bar is dragged to the view frame bor-der, it disappears, and the number of views is decreased in half. This is true for both the horizontal and vertical splitter bars. When the last splitter bar is dragged away to the view frame border, the single view is left. It is also possible to drag from the intersection of the horizontal and vertical dividers to any corner of the view to eliminate 3 views at once.

Another way to divide the view into two or four independent views is to drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bars with the mouse. Notice the two splitter bars at the graphics processor window, one is at the far left of the horizontal scroll bar, and the other is at the very top of the vertical scroll bar. Using the left mouse button, grab the lower left splitter bar and drag it to the right. The graphics window splits into two panes, left and right. When the mouse button is released, both panes are updated. Again using the left mouse button, grab the upper right splitter bar and drag it down. The two existing panes

5-40 Piping Input


split into two additional panes, upper and lower. When the mouse button is released, all four panes are updated, with the X axis view in the upper left pane, the Y axis view in the upper right pane, the Z axis view in the lower left pane, and a isometric (or original) view in the lower right pane.

The screen captures above displays 4 panes in view and the state of the graphics engine when the horizontal split bar is removed leaving 2 panes in view.

Note The image in any of these panes can be manipulated individually. Each pane can be rotated, panned, or zoomed independently of the other panes.

3D Graphics Highlights: Materials, Diameters, Wall Thickness, Insulation

Often it is necessary to review the piping model in the context of certain data; for exam-ple, by diameter, wall thickness, temperature, or pressure. These operations are illustrated below.

When the Diameters button is clicked, the display updates to show each diameter in a dif-ferent color. A color key (legend is included on the left side of the plot in a separate win-dow. This option can be used to quickly see the diameter variations throughout the system. This is a good way to verify that diameter changes have been made where appro-priate.

Clicking the Wall Thickness, Insulation, or Materials buttons produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the differ-ent data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left.

Note The legend window may be resized and/or removed from the view.

Note While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated. Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can be used without affecting the model highlighted state.

Note Clicking the same button twice will deactivate the coloring effect.

Note The same functionality may be achieved from the Options Menu by selecting Materials, Diameters, Wall Thickness, or Insulation menu options. Alternatively, the user may use the corresponding keyboard keys: M - to view different materi-als; D - to view different diameters, W - to view different wall thickness through-out the model, and I - to view the insulation.

Note When the model is being printed (File Menu/ Print) while in one of the high-lighted modes described herein, the color key legend will appear in the upper left corner of the page. This is always true, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.

Piping Input 5-41


3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure

When the Temperature button is clicked, the display updates to highlight the pipe elements for a particular temperature vector in a different color. A color key (legend is included on the left side of the plot in a separate window. This option can be used to quickly see tem-perature variations throughout the system. This is a good way to verify that temperature changes have been made where appropriate. When more than one (operating temperature has been specified, a drop list is presented so that the (single desired temperature vector can be used in coloring the model.

Clicking the Pressure button produces results similar to the ones described in the Tempera-ture section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corre-sponding legend appears on the left. When more than one (operating pressure has been defined, a drop list with up to 9 pressure (and a hydro pressure, HYD, if defined choices appears.

Note Only the pressures and temperatures that were actually defined in the input will appear in the drop down menu as a choice.

Note The legend window may be resized and/or dragged away from the view.

Note While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated. Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can still be used without affecting the model highlighted state.


Note The same functionality may be achieved from the Options Menu by selecting the Temperatures or Pressures menu options. Alternatively, the Temperatures can be accessed by pressing keyboard number buttons 1 through 9.

Note When the model is being printed File Menu/ Print while in one of the highlighted modes described herein, the color key legend will appear in the upper left corner of the page. This is always true, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.

3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads

The 3D/HOOPS Graphics engine can display applied/predefined displacements, forces, uniform loads, or wind/wave loads in a tabular format. The display windows can be scrolled vertically and or horizontally to view all node points where data has been defined. To flip through the defined displacement or force vectors 1 through 9, use the Next and Previous buttons at the bottom of the tabular legend window. The color key at the far left of

5-42 Piping Input


the window assists in locating the node points on the model (when the model geome-try is complex).

Note that the displacements window shows the user specified values as well as free or fixed Degrees of Freedom (DOF). In this case, a DOF is free if a displacement value is not specified in any of the displacement load vectors. Note also that if a cer-tain DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load vectors, then it is fixed in all other load vectors.

• The Forces option behaves similar to the described Displacements option, the model elements are highlighted for a particular force vector, and the color key legend grid window displays on the left. The node number in combination with a color key specifies the location where the force and moment values are defined.

• The Uniform Loads option has three vectors defined. The Node column repre-sents the start node number where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Since the data propagates throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.

• Wind/Wave option displays the loading coefficients. The color key is defined as follows: all the elements with wind defined are colored in red color; all the ele-ments with wave data defined are colored in green color. The legend grid shows the relevant data items defined by the user.

Note The legend window may be resized and/or removed from the view.

Note While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated. Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can still be used without affecting the model highlighted state.


Note The same functionality may be achieved from the Options Menu by select-ing the relevant options. Alternatively, the predefined Displacements can be accessed by pressing the F3 on the keyboard; the forces/moment vectors can be accessed by pressing the F5 on the keyboard.

Note When the model is being printed File Menu/Print while in one of the high-lighted modes described herein, the color key legend appears on the second page following the model bitmap image. The legend is presented in the tabu-lar form similar to the legend window. This is always true, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.

• Select by Single Click allows the attainment of element data. When this mode is active, hovering on a pipe element (with the mouse shows a bubble with the ele-ment's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe size data. Actually clicking an element shows a mini-spreadsheet. The element is highlighted and zoomed to selection.

Piping Input 5-43


Clicking a different element highlights the relevant element and changes the data in the mini-spreadsheet accordingly.

Note The Element Information window can be moved around or away from the view.

Note Clicking the empty space of the graphics view de-highlights the element. The mini-spreadsheet will still contain the information from the last element selected. To close the Element Information dialog, click the X in the right upper corner.

Clicking the Spreadsheet button on the Element Information dialog displays the full input spreadsheet for the associated pipe element. If the monitor resolution permits, both the piping input spreadsheet and the graphics window can be viewed simultaneously. Select-ing a different element on the graphics view displays the associated data on the spread-sheet. Similarly, changing any data on the piping input spreadsheet (or just jumping to a different element updates the graphics view correspondingly.

Note The main Piping Input spreadsheet may also be brought to view by clicking the View Input Spreadsheet button.

Limiting amount of displayed information: Find Node, Range, Cutting Plane

Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of displayed information on the screen. This may be useful when the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches. There are several ways to achieve this results by clicking either the Find Node, Range, or Cutting Plane button. The description of these operations, their advantages and disadvantages are illustrated below.

• The Find Node option is particularly useful when a specific node or an element needs to be found. Click the Find Node button. A dialog appears asking for the FROM and TO nodes to search for. The node numbers can be entered in either of the two fields, or in both. Entering only the FROM node number causes the feature to search for the first available element that starts with the specified node number. Entering only the TO node number causes the feature to search for an element ending with the specified node number. Whenever the element is located, it is highlighted, and the view is zoomed to the element. The user may zoom out to better recognize the location of the highlighted element within the model.

In many cases, the elements/node numbers are not defined consecutively. Thus, it may be easier to cut a portion of the model at a certain location to see more details. For this opera-tion, use the Insert Cutting Plane button. When the cutting plane appears, use the handles to move/rotate the plane as desired. If cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the dis-play goes blank, the view may be zoomed too close for the plane to operate correctly. Use the Zoom button to zoom out; then click the Cutting Plane button again for the handles to appear. To disable the cutting plane, click on the display with the right mouse button and click Delete Cutting Plane from the menu.

The Range option is used to plot only those elements that contain nodes within the range specified by the user. This is particularly helpful when attempting to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a rather large, often symmetrical model. Click the Range

5-44 Piping Input


button or press the U key to display the range dialog. A sorted list of all defined node num-bers with corresponding check marks appears. Clicking a check box next to a particular node number will toggle it enable or disable it.

Note Only elements with check marks on will display when the OK button is clicked. If the Range option was previously used, consecutive clicks will display the dialog with the current state of the shown/hidden elements and the corresponding check marks.

The Range dialog enables selection and dragging of consecutive node numbers (click the left mouse button on the first node of the desired selection, then move the mouse while holding the mouse button down, and release the button at the last node of the desired selection). Alternatively, users may click the first node, press the SHIFT key and click the last node of the selection using the mouse button. Clicking the check mark with the rectan-gle once toggles the status, and the is applied to the highlighted selection.

Use the FROM and TO fields together with the Add button to specify/add to the range of elements that are already selected. If only the FROM node is specified and Add is clicked, all elements (from this node and up will be selected). Clicking the Reverse Selection button will toggle the check marks for the elements to show: it will show the previously hidden elements, and hide the previously shown elements. When Clear All is clicked, none of the elements are selected (and the graphics view appears blank). Use this button to clear the selection.

Note, if none of the elements are selected, and OK is clicked, the view becomes blank. To show the entire model, click the Select All button.

Note Using the Range option affects the display and operation of other 3D Graphics Highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the Range option, then clicking the Show Diameters option will only highlight the elements that are actually visible. As another example, if using the Range option hides any nodes containing the predefined displacements, the Dis-placements legend grid still appears, but the model is be properly highlighted.

Note The Find Node option may not work properly for the part of the model that is hid-den by the Range. The corresponding message will also appear in the status bar.

• Save an Image for Later Presentation: TIF and HTML

Occaisoinally, it is necessary to add a graphical representation of a model to the CAESAR II stress reports. The 3D/Hoops Graphics view can be saved as a bitmap by clicking the Save Image to TIF File button. The model geometry, colors, highlighting, as well as restraints and most of the other options will be transferred to the bitmap. Upon clicking the Save Image to TIF File button, the Save Image As TIF dialog appears asking the user to specify the desired file name and a directory for the file to be saved. The default bitmap file name is the job name with an extension .TIF. This is a standard, Windows supported image file extension, that can be opened for viewing. The image resolution can also be changed in the Save As... dialog.

Note This is a static bitmap file.

Piping Input 5-45


Note, due to certain limitations of the 3D/HOOPS modeler (the tool created by a third party), the legend window and text cannot be saved to the bitmap. However, all coloring, as well as the annotations and markups are successfully saved.

Another way to save an image is uing the File Menu/ Save as Web Page option, or alterna-tively, clicking the combination of SHIFT + H keyboard keys. This will create three files in the current data directory using the current job name: *.HTML, *.HSF, and *.HMF. Opening the .HTML file should display the corresponding .HSF file.

Note, this is an interactive file.

The first time a CAESAR II - created .HTML file is opened with an Internet Explorer or other internet browser, usesr receive a message asking to download a control from Tech-SoftAmerica. The user should answer Yes to allow the download, and the image will be displayed. Once the model appears, selecting and right-clicking the model shows the available viewing options, such as orbit, pan, zoom, different render modes, etc. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard as necessary.

Note Internet Explorer (IE version 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly. Since IE5 is no longer supported by Microsoft, COADE recommends IE6 or later.

• Annotations

There are times when annotation is needed to clarify the model image. This could be use-ful to highlight a problem area, or write a brief description of the model. The annotation may be especially useful in the output processor for more information refer to the discus-sion at the end of this section. The CAESAR II 3D/HOOPS Graphics processor provides several types of annotation as discussed below.

When the Annotate Model button is clicked, the annotation text box with a leader line to an element is added to the graphics view. To add the annotation, click with the left mouse but-ton on a particular element to start the leader line, while holding the mouse button down drag the leader line to the annotation point, then type in the annotation text, and then press the Enter key.

Note The annotation text box is single line only.

Note The annotation with a leader stays with the model on zoom, pan, rotate, and use of any highlight options. Annotation also gets printed to the printer and saved to the bitmap. Annotations are not saved to the HTML file.

Note The color and font face/size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Change Display Options, for more information refer to the the 3D Graphics Con-figuration paragraph below.

Another type of annotation is FreeHand Markup that displays the following options: Free Hand, Circle, Rectangle, and Annotate. After clicking the black arrow to the right of the button, a menu with these four choices appears. Selecting any of the options places a check mark next to the option and activates it.

5-46 Piping Input


Drawing a circle or a rectangle may be useful to emphasize certain elements, nodes, or other geometric features. The Annotate option here creates a text box anywhere on the view; it is not attached to any specific element. Type the text and click Enter. It may be useful to add a short description of the model to the graphics image for printing or saving as a bitmap.

Note This markup annotation text box is single line only. The color and the font face/size cannot be changed the default color is red.

Note The markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.

Note The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary; they are not saved with the model, and disappear from view with any change like zoom, rotate, or pan.

3D Graphics Interactive Feature: Walk Through

Clicking the Walk Through button makes it possible to explore the scene of the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application or game. It produces the effect of walking towards the model; and once close to (or inside the model users can look left, right, up, and down, step to a side, or ride an elevator up and down. After clicking the Walk button, the mouse cursor changes to the feet icon.

In order for the Walk feature to work properly, the model has to be in one of the orthogonal views (such as front, back, left, or right), and in the perspective projection. The 3D Graph-ics engine may not work properly if the model is in ISO view or in top/bottom orthogonal views. This is a limitation of the graphics engine’s camera, with regard to lighting relative positions, derived from the assumption that it is not possible (in real life to walk vertically (for example, from the top of the model down.

The list of available commands for the walk through operation are provided below:

• Walk Forward: Clicking the W key provides the effect of walking towards the model; the model will appear to grow, similar to being zoomed in

• Walk Backward: Clicking the S key provides the effect of walking away from the model; the model will appear to become smaller, similar to being zoomed out

• Elevator Up: Clicking the Q key provides the effect or riding the elevator up; the model will move down, staying on the same optical distance to the viewer

• Elevator Down: Clicking the Z key provides the effect of riding the elevator down; the model will move up, staying on the same optical distance to the viewer

• Pan Left: Clicking the A key provides the effect of making a side step to the left; the model will appear to move right, staying on the same optical distance to the viewer

• Pan Right: Clicking the D key provides the effect of making a side step to the right; the model will appear to move left, staying on the same optical distance to the viewer

Left Mouse Button Down

Piping Input 5-47


• Look Around: Clicking the left mouse button and moving the mouse up, down, left, or right, provides the effect of looking around. This option is particularly useful when model is close to the viewer, or the viewer is inside the model

Both Mouse Buttons Down

• Walk: When both left and right mouse buttons are pushed down together, moving the mouse up and down will provide the effect of walking forward and backward to the model, similar to using the W and S keyboard keys. This provides better interaction and faster response to achieve the same goal.

Wheel Scroll

• Zoom: Scrolling the mouse wheel will provide the effect of zooming in and out.

Wheel Down

• Pan: Holding the mouse wheel down and moving the mouse up, down, left, or right, provides the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to the side, similar to using the keyboard buttons Q, Z, A, or D. The mouse cursor will change to a hand icon.

The Walk option is useful in providing a real time interactive view of the model. To exit from this option, click any other operator (for example, pan, rotate, or zoom.

• Troubleshooting: While walking it is not possible to look back at the model (you need to use the back orthogonal view of the model as a starting point for walking or walk from the top. If any of these limitations are accidentally met, the camera versus light-ing position will become undefined, and the view may get corrupted. It is easy to cor-rect the problem. Since the current state of the model is maintained in the *.XML file, it is easy to simply delete the file. First, close the Graphics processor window. To delete the *.XML file, open the Windows Explorer, navigate and open the data direc-tory (where the CAESAR II input file in question is located. Find the XML data file (job-name.XML and delete it. Then return to the piping input. Upon invoking of the 3D Graphics engine, the model will be displayed in the CAESAR II default state for more information refer to the the discussion at the beginning of the document.

5-48 Piping Input

�� 2,��.��5�%��5��

��.�� ;)� ��%�� >��'��"�� 3% ��#��*�� ++�<��)��%�� +�9��%��((�� +2

�� )��.��5��)� ��5��<��)��5�� 6��'��)�� *

Error Checking CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Error CheckingStatic analysis cannot be performed until the error checking portion of the piping prepro-cessor has been successfully completed. Only after error checking is completed are the required analysis data files created. Similarly, any subsequent changes made to the model input is not reflected in the analysis unless error checking is rerun after those changes have been made. CAESAR II does not allow an analysis to take place if the input has been changed and not successfully error checked.

Error Checking can only be done from the input spreadsheet, and is initiated by executing the Start Run or Batch Run commands from the toolbar, menu or the Quit options menu (the Quit options menu appears upon closing the spreadsheet).

Piping Quit Options Menu

The Start Run command exits the input processor, starts the error checking procedure, and returns the user to the Main Menu for further action.

The Batch Run command causes the program to check the input data, analyze the system, and present the results without any user interaction. The assumptions are that the loading cases to be analyzed do not need to change and that the default account number (if accounting active) is correct. These criteria are usually met after the first pass through the analysis. Batch processing focuses the user’s attention on the creation of input and the review of output by expediting the steps in between.

Once invoked, the error checker reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts the user to any possible errors, inconsistencies, or noteworthy items. These items are presented to the user as Errors, Warnings, or Notes.

Start Run

Batch Run

6-2 Error Checking, Static Load Cases, and Analysis

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Error Checking

Fatal Error Dialog

Errors are flagged when there is a problem with the model due to which analysis cannot continue. An example of this would be if no length is defined for a piping element. These errors are also called fatal errors, since they are fatal to the analysis, and must be corrected before continuing.

Error Checking, Static Load Cases, and Analysis 6-3


Warning Dialog

Warnings are flagged whenever there is a problem with a model which can be overcome using some assumptions. An example of this would be if an element’s wall thickness is insufficient to meet the minimum wall thickness for the given pressure (hoop stress). Warnings need not be corrected in order to get a successful analysis, but all warnings should be reviewed carefully by the user as they are displayed.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Error Checking

Note Dialog

The third category of alert is the informational note. These messages simply inform the user of some noteworthy fact related to the model. An example of a note may be a mes-sage informing the user of the number of hangers to be designed by the CAESAR II pro-gram. For notes, there is nothing for the user to “correct.”

Available Commands

A number of commands are available to the user during error checking:

• OK—Indicates that the message has been reviewed by the user, and the error checking should continue.

• Cancel—Cancels error checking and returns to the Main Menu.

• File - Print—Prints the most recent message.

• File - Print All—Prints all messages.

• Option - Restart—Restarts the error checking process.

• Option - Fatal Only—Causes the program to display only fatal error messages, ignoring notes and warnings.

• Option - Off—“Turns off,” or ignores subsequent occurrences of, the most recently displayed message.

• Option - Return—Returns to the piping input processor. This is gener-ally selected when a fatal error must be fixed.

Once error checking has been completed, the program then performs a few miscellaneous calculations such as those for nozzle flexibilities and the center of gravity report (these calculations may be printed out with the Miscellaneous Data reports in the Static Output Processor).

Once the model has been successfully error-checked, the user must generate the required files in order to continue the analysis. This is done by pressing OK with the Generate Files option selected on the closing dialog.

OK

Cancel

File - Print

File - Print All

Option - Restart

Option - Fatal Only

Option - Off

Option - Return



Error Checking Closing Dialog


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Building Static Load Cases

Building Static Load CasesThe first step in the analysis of an error-checked piping model is the specifica-tion of the static load cases. This is done by selection of the Analysis-Static options from the CAESAR II Main Menu (the piping input file must have successfully gone through error checking before this option can be chosen).

A discussion of CAESAR II load cases is included at the end of this chapter. Please refer to it for a description of how the load cases are built.

Upon entering the static load case editor, a screen appears which lists all of the available loads that are defined in the input, the available stress types, and the current load cases offered for analysis. If the job is entering static analysis for the first time, CAESAR II presents a list of recommended load cases. If the job has been run previously, the loads shown are those saved during the last session. A typical load case editor screen is shown below:

Load Case Editor

The user can define up to ninety-nine load cases. Load cases may be edited by clicking on a line in the Load List area.

Only the load components listed in the upper left-hand portion of the screen may be speci-fied in the load cases. The entries must be identical to what is shown on the screen. Avail-

Analysis - Statics


Building Static Load Cases CAESAR II - User’s Guide

able stress types are specified at the end of the load case entry in parentheses. Stress type determines the stress calculation method and the allowable stress to use (if any).

Load Cases may be built through drag and drop actions. Dragging a load component from the Loads Defined in Input list to a line on the load list automatically adds the load com-ponent to the load case, if it is not already included. Highlighted basic load cases may be dragged down to be added to algebraic combination cases (CAESAR II may prompt for combination type). Use the Load Case Options tab to select combination methods and other specifics pertaining to the load cases.

Note Defining a fatigue (FAT) stress type for a load case automatically displays a field in which the number of anticipated load cycles for that load case can be entered.

All basic (non-combination) load sets must all be specified before any algebraic combina-tions may be declared. This rule holds true for user defined and edited load cases.

The following commands are available on this screen:

• Edit-Insert—This command inserts a blank load case preceding the currently selected line in the load list. If no line is selected, the load case is added at the end of the list. Load cases are selected by clicking on the number to the left of the load case.

• Edit-Delete—This command deletes the currently selected load case.

• File Analysis—This command accepts the load cases and runs the job.

• Recommend—This command allows the user to replace the cur-rent load cases with the CAESAR II recommended load cases.

• Load Cycles—This button alternatively hides or displays the Load Cycles field in the Load Case list. Entries in these fields are only valid / required for load cases defined with the fatigue stress type.

Edit - Insert

Edit - Delete

File - Analysis

Recommend

Load Cycles


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Providing Wind Data

Providing Wind DataUp to four different wind load cases may be specified for any one job.

The only wind load information that is specified in the piping input is the shape factor. It is this shape factor input that causes load cases WIN1, WIN2, WIN3, and WIN4 to be listed as an available load to be analyzed. More wind data is required, however, before an analy-sis can be made. When wind loads are used in the model, CAESAR II makes available the screen to define the extra wind load data. Once defined, this input is stored and may be changed on subsequent entries into the static analysis processor.

To specify the wind data needed for the analysis select the tab entitled Wind Load for the appropriate wind load case. The screen shown below appears:

Wind Load Specifications

There are three different methods that can be used to generate wind loads on piping sys-tems:

• ASCE #7 Standard Edition, 1995

• User entry of a pressure vs. elevation table

• User entry of a velocity vs. elevation table

The appropriate method is selected by placing a value of 1.0 in one of the first three boxes.


Providing Wind Data CAESAR II - User’s Guide

When defining a pressure or velocity vs. elevation table the user needs to specify only the method and the wind direction on the preceding screen. Upon pressing the User Wind Pro-file button, the user is prompted for the corresponding pressure or velocity table. If a uni-form pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system, then only a single entry needs to be made in the table, otherwise the user should enter the pressure or velocity pro-file for the applicable wind loading.

Note To use the ASCE #7 wind loads, all of the fields should be filled in.

For example, as per ASCE #7, the following are typical basic wind-speed values:

California and West Coast Areas- 124.6 ft./sec. ( 85 m.p.h.)

Rocky Mountains - 132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)

Great Plains- 132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)

Non-Coastal Eastern United States- 132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)

Gulf Coast- 190.6 ft./sec (130 m.p.h.)

Florida-Carolinas- 190.6 ft./sec (130 m.p.h.)

Miami- 212.6 ft./sec (145 m.p.h.)

New England Coastal Areas- 176.0 ft./sec (120 m.p.h.)


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters

Specifying Hydrodynamic ParametersUp to four different hydrodynamic load cases may be specified for any one job.

Several hydrodynamic coefficients are defined on the element spreadsheet. The inclusion of hydrodynamic coefficients causes the loads WAV1, WAV2, WAV3, and WAV4 to be available in the load case editor.

A CAESAR II hydrodynamic loading dialog is shown in the following figure.

In the load case editor, four different wave load profiles may be specified. Current data and wave data may be specified and included together or either of them may be omitted so as not to be considered in the analysis. CAESAR II supports three current models and six wave models. See the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for a detailed discussion of hydrodynamic analysis.


Execution of Static Analysis CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Execution of Static AnalysisThe static analysis performed by CAESAR II follows the regular finite element solution routine. Element stiffnesses are combined to form a global system stiffness matrix. Each basic load case defines a set of loads for the ends of all the elements. These elemental load sets are combined into system load vectors. Using the relationship of force equals stiff-ness times displacement (F=KX), the unknown system deflections and rotations can be calculated. The knowns, however, may change during the analysis as hanger sizing, non-linear supports, and friction all affect both the stiffness matrix and load vectors. The root solution from this equation, the system-wide deflections and rotations, is used with the element stiffnesses to determine the global (X,Y,Z) forces and moments at the end of each element. These forces and moments are translated into a local coordinate system for the element from which the code-defined stresses are calculated. Forces and moments on anchors, restraints, and fixed displacement points are summed to balance all global forces and moments entering the node. Algebraic combinations of the basic load cases pick up this process where appropriate - at the displacement, force & moment, or stress level.

Once the setup for the solution is complete the calculation of the displacements and rota-tions is repeated for each of the basic load cases. During this step, the Incore Solution sta-tus screen appears.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Execution of Static Analysis

Incore Solution Module

This screen serves as a monitor of the static analysis. The screen is broken down into sev-eral areas. The area on the upper left reflects the size of the job by listing the number of equations to be solved and the bandwidth of the matrix which holds these equations. Mul-tiplying the number of equations by the bandwidth gives a relative indication of the job size. This area also lists the current load case being analyzed and the total number of basic load cases to be solved. The iteration count, as well as the current case number, shows how much “work” has already been completed. Load cases with nonlinear restraints may require several solutions (iterations) before the changing assumptions about the restraint configuration (e.g. resting or lifting off, active or inactive) are confirmed. In the lower left screen of the big box are two bar graphs which indicate where the program is in an indi-vidual solution. These bar graphs illustrate the speed of the solution. By checking the data in this first box, an experienced user will have a good idea of how much longer to wait for the results.


Execution of Static Analysis CAESAR II - User’s Guide

The right side of the solution screen also provide information to the user regarding status of nonlinear restraints and hangers in the job. For example, messages noting the number of restraints that have yet to converge or any hangers that appear to be taking no load, are dis-played here. Nonlinear restraint status may be stepped through on an individual basis by using the [F2]/[F4] function keys.

Following the analysis of the system deflections and rotations, these results are post-pro-cessed in order to calculate the local forces, moments, and stresses for the basic load cases and all results for the algebraic combinations (e.g. DS1-DS2). These total system results are stored in a file with the suffix “_P” (e.g. TUTOR._P).

Note The “_A” or input file, the “_P” or output file, and the "OTL" (Output Time Link File) are all that is required to archive the static analysis. The remaining scratch files may be eliminated from the system without any impact on the work com-pleted.

During this post processing, the Status screen lists the current element for which the forces and stresses are being calculated. Once the last element’s stresses are computed, the output processor screen is presented. It is through this menu the graphic and tabular results of the analysis can be interactively reviewed by the user. Interactive processing of output results is discussed in detail in Chapter 7 of this document.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Execution of Static Analysis

Static Output Screen


Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases

Definition of a Load Case

In CAESAR II terms, a load case is a group of piping system loads that are analyzed together, i.e., that are assumed to be occurring at the same time. An example of a load case is an operating analysis composed of the thermal, deadweight, and pressure loads together. Another is an as-installed analysis of deadweight loads alone. A load case may also be composed of the combinations of the results of other load cases; for example, the differ-ence in displacements between the operating and installed cases. No matter what the con-tents of the load case, it always produces a set of reports in the output which list restraint loads, displacements and rotations, internal forces, moments, and stresses. Because of pip-ing code definitions of calculation methods and/or allowable stresses, the load cases are also tagged with a stress category. For example, the combination mentioned above might be tagged as an EXPansion stress case.

The piping system loads which compose the basic (non-combination) load sets relate to various input items found on the piping input screen. The table below lists the individual load set designations, their names and the input items which make them available for anal-ysis.

Designation Name Input items which activate this load case

W Deadweight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Fluid Weight,Rigid Weight

WNC Weight No fluid Contents Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Rigid Weight

WW Water Weight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Water-filledWeight, Rigid Weight (usually used forHydro Test)

T1 Thermal Set 1 Temperature #1



.

.

.


P1 Pressure Set 1 Pressure #1



.

.

.


HP Hydrostatic Test Pressure Hydro Pressure

D1 Displacements Set 1 Displacements (1st Vector)

D2 Displacements Set 2 Displacements (2nd Vector)


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases

D3 Displacements Set 3 Displacements (3rd Vector)

.

.

.

D9 Displacement Set 9 Displacements (9th Vector)

F1 Force Set 1 Forces/Moments (1st Vector)

F2 Force Set 2 Forces/Moments (2nd Vector)

F3 Force Set 3 Forces/Moments (3rd Vector)

.

.

.

F9 Force Set 9 Forces/Moments (9th Vector)

WIN1 Wind Load 1 Wind Shape Factor




WAV1 Wave Load 1 Wave Load On




U1 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (1st Vector)

U2 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (2nd Vector)

U3 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (3rd Vector)

CS Cold Spring Material # 18 or 19

H Hanger Initial Loads Hanger Design or Pre-specified Hangers

Note Available piping system loads are displayed on the left hand side of the Static Load Case screen.

Basic load cases may consist of a single load such as WNC for an as-installed weight anal-ysis, or they may include several loads added together such as W+T1+P1+D1+F1 for an operating analysis. The stress categories: SUStained, EXPansion, OCCasional, OPErat-ing, and FATigue are specified at the end of the load case definition. The complete defini-tion of the two examples are: WNC (SUS) and W+T1+P1+D1+H (OPE). Each basic load case is entered in this manner in a list for analysis.

When building basic load cases, load components (such as W, T1, D1, WIND1, etc.) may now be preceded by scale factors such as 2.0, -0.5, etc. Likewise, when building combina-tion cases, references to previous load cases may also be preceded by scale factors as well. This provides the user with a number of benefits:

• In the event that one loading is a multiple of the other (i.e., safe Shutdown Earthquake being two times Operating Basis Earthquake, only one load-ing need be entered in the piping input module; it may be used in a scaled or unscaled form in the Load Case Editor.



• In the event that a loading may be directionally reversible (i.e., wind or earthquake) only one loading need be entered in the piping input module; it may be used preceded by a + or a - to switch direction.

• Load Rating Design Factor (LRDF) methods may be implemented by scaling individual load components by their risk-dependent factors, for example:

1.05W + 1.1T1+1.1D1+1.25 WIND1

Note Available stress types may be selected from the pull-down list on each line.

Results of the basic load cases may be combined using algebraic combination cases. These algebraic combinations are always entered following the last of the basic load cases. Com-binations of basic load cases are designated using the prefix L1, L2, etc.

Note All load cases with stress type FATigue must have their expected number of Load Cycles specified.

An example set of loads appears below.

The following family of load cases provides a valid example of algebraic combinations.



Load Case Designation Comments

1 W+T1+P1+H+0.67CS (OPE) Hot operating; note the 0.67 scale factorwhich takes credit only for 2/3 of the cold spring

2 W1+P1+H+0.67CS(OPE) Cold operating: with cold springincluded

3 W1+P1+H(SUS) Traditional sustained case

4 WIN1(OCC) Wind case; note this will be manipu-lated later to represent average wind(1X), maximum wind (2X), as wellas positive and negative directions.

5 L1-L2(EXP) Traditional expansion case, cold tohot (note reference to "L" for"Load", rather than "DS".

6 L1-L2(FAT) Same case but now evaluated forfatigue at 10,000 cycles.

7 L1+L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (inpositive direction).

8 L1-L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (innegative direction).

9 L1+2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind(in positive direction).

10 L1-2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind(in negative direction).

11 L2+L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind(in positive direction).

12 L2-L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind(in negative direction).

13 L2+2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind(in positive direction).

14 L2-2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind(in negative direction).

15 L3+L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustainedplus average wind.

16 L3+2L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustainedplus maximum wind.

17 L9+L10+L11+L12(OPE) Maximum restraint load case (thecombination option should beMAX).



Note CAESAR II permits the specification of up to ninety-nine load cases for analysis. In the rare situation where more cases are required, the model should be copied to a new file in order to specify the additional load cases.



Load Case Options Tab

CAESAR II offers a second tab on the Static Load Case screen - Load Case Options. Among other features, this screen allows the user to define alternative and more meaning-ful Load Case names, as shown in the figure below.

User Defined Names

The user-defined names appear in the Static Output Processor in the Load Case Report (for more information, see below), and may also be used in place of the built load case names anywhere in the Static Output Processor, by activating the appropriate option.

Note Load case names may not exceed 132 characters in length.



User Control of Produced Results Data

CAESAR II allows the user to specify whether any or all of the load case results are retained for review in the Static Output Processor. This is done through the use of two con-trols found on the Load Case Options tab. These are:

Output Status

This item controls the disposition of the entire results of the load case -- the available op tions are Keep or Discard. The former would be used when the load case is producing results that the user may wish to review; the latter option would be used for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate construction cases. For example, in the load list shown in the figure, the Wind only load case could have been optionally des-ignated as Discard, since it was built only to be used in subsequent combinations, and has no great value as a standalone load case. Note that load cases used for hanger design (i.e., the weight load case and hanger travel cases designated with the stress type HGR) must be designated as Discard. Note that for all load cases created under previous versions of CAESAR II, all load cases except the HGR cases are converted as Keep; likewise the default for all new cases (except for HGR load cases) is also Keep.

Output Type

This item designates the type of results that are available for the load cases which have received a Keep status. This could be used to help minimize clutter on the output end, and ensure that only meaningful results are retained. The available options are:

Disp/Force/Stress

This option provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This would be a good choice for Operating cases, when designing to those codes which do a code check on operating stresses, because the load case would be of interest for interference checking (displacements) and restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces).

Disp/Stress

This option provides displacements and stresses only.

Force Stress

This option provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This might be a good choice for the Sustained (cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces), and code compliance (stresses). Note that FR combination loads cases developed under previous versions of versions of CAESAR II are converted with this Force/Stress type.

Disp

This option provides displacements only.

Force

This option provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces only.



Stress

This option provides stresses only. This would be a good choice for a sustained plus Occasional load case (with Abs combination method), since this is basically an artifi-cial construct used for code stress checking purposes only. Note that ST combination load cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted with this Stress type.

Snubbers Active?

Activating this option causes the snubbers to be considered to be rigid restraints for this particular load case. By default, OCC load cases activate this option, while other types of load cases default to an inactive state.

Hanger Design

The three options available here are As Designed, Rigid, and Ignore, and cause CAESAR II to (1) consider the actual spring hanger stiffnesses, (2) model the spring hangers as rigid restraints, or (3) remove the spring hanger stiffnesses from the model, respectively. As Designed should be used for most "real" (non-hanger design) load cases. Rigid should be used for the Restrained Weight case and any Hydrotest Case (if the spring hangers are pinned during it). (Note that during the Restrained Weight Case user-defined hangers will not be made rigid.) Ignore is normally used for the Operating for Hanger Travel Cases -- except in those cases where the user wishes to include the stiffness of the selected spring in the Operating for Hanger Travel Case (and iterate to a solution). In that case, the user should select As Designed for those cases as well. In that case, it is very important that the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) be adjusted to match the reported hanger Cold Load.

Friction Multiplier

This multiplier may be used to alter (or deactivate) the friction factors used in this particu-lar load case. The friction factor (Mu) used at each restraint will be this multiplier times the Mu factor at each restraint. Setting this value to zero deactivates friction for this load case.



User-Controlled Combination Methods

For combination cases, CAESAR II provides the user with the ability to explicitly desig-nate the combination method to be used. Load cases to be combined are designated as L1, L2, etc., for Load Case 1, Load Case 2, etc., with the combination method selected from a drop list on the Load Case Options tab. The available methods are:

Algebraic

This method combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and pressures of the designated load cases in an algebraic (vectorial) manner. The resultant forces, moments, and pressures are then used (along with the SIFs and element cross-sectional parameters) to calculate the piping stresses. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors (1.8, -, etc.) prior to doing the combination.

The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods DS and FR used an Algebraic combina-tion method. Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the DS and FR methods are converted to the Algebraic method. Also, new combination cases automatically default to this method, unless designated by the user). In the load case list shown in the figure, most of the combination cases are typically built with the Algebraic method.

Note that in the load case list shown in the figure, most of the combination cases typically are built with the Algebraic method. Note that Algebraic combinations may be built only from basic (i.e., non-combination) load cases or other load cases built using the Algebraic combination method.

Scalar

This method combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in a Scalar manner (i.e., not as vectors, but retaining consider-ation of sign). Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the com-bination (for example, for a negative multiplier, stresses would be subtractive). This method might typically be used when adding plus or minus seismic loads to an operating case, or when doing an Occasional Stress Code check (i.e. scalar addition of the Sustained and Occasional stresses).

The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods ST used a Scalar combination method. Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the ST method are converted to the Scalar method.

SRSS

This method combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in a Square Root of the Sum of the Squares (SRSS) manner. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the combination how-ever, due to the squaring used by the combination method, negative values vs. positive values will yield no difference in the result. This method is typically used when combining seismic loads acting in orthogonal directions.



ABS

This method combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in an Absolute Value manner. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the combination however, due to the absolute values used by the combination method, negative values vs. positive values will yield no difference in the result. This method may be used when doing an Ocassional Stress code check (i.e., absolute summation of the Sustained and Occasional stresses).

Note The Ocassional Stress cases in the figure are built using this method.

Max

For each result value, this combination method selects the displacement, force, moment, restraint load, and stress having the largest absolute value from the designated load cases; so no actual combination per se, takes place. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the maxima. This method is typically used when determining the design case (worst loads, stress, etc.) from a number of loads.

Note The maximum Restraint Load case shown in the figure uses a Max combination method.

Min

For each result value, this combination method selects the displacement, force, moment, restraint load, and stress having the smallest absolute value from the designated load cases; so no actual combination per se, takes place. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the minima.

SignMax

For each result value, this combination method selects the displacements, force, moments, restraint load, and stress having the largest actual value, considering the sign, from the designated load cases; so no actual combination per se, takes place. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the maxima. This combina-tion method would typically be used in conjunction with the SignMin method to find the design range for each value (i.e., the maximum positive and maximum negative restraint loads).

SignMin

For each result value, this combination method selects the displacements, force, moments, restraint load, and stress having the smallest actual value, considering the sign, from the designated load cases; so no actual combination per se, takes place. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the minima. This combina-tion method would typically be used in conjunction with the SignMax method to find the design range for each value (i.e., the maximum positive and maximum negative restraint loads).



Recommended Load Cases

When the user first enters the static load case editor CAESAR II recommends, based on the loads defined in the model, three types of load cases: Operating, Sustained, and Expan-sion (but not occasional).

Operating load cases represent the loads acting on the pipe during hot operation, including both primary (weight pressure, and force) loadings and secondary (displacement and ther-mal) loadings. Operating cases are used to find hot displacements for interference check-ing, and hot restraint and equipment loads. Generally when recommending operating load cases, CAESAR II combines weight, pressure case #1, and hanger loads with each of the thermal load cases (displacement set #1 with thermal set #1, displacement set #2 with ther-mal set #2, etc....), and then with any cold spring loads.

Sustained load cases represent the primary force-driven loadings acting on the pipe, i.e., weight and pressure alone. This usually coincides with the cold (as-installed) load case. Sustained load cases are used to satisfy the code sustained stress requirements, as well as to calculate as-installed restraint and equipment loads. Sustained load cases are generally built by combining weight with each of the pressure and force sets, and then with any hanger loads.

Expansion load cases represent the range between the displacement extremes (usually between the operating and sustained cases). Expansion load cases are used to meet expan-sion stress requirements.

Most users will specify only one temperature and one pressure. Such input would simplify the recommended cases to something like:

Case # 1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ....OPERATING

Case # 2 W+P1+H (SUS)....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE

Case # 3 L1-L2 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE

The user should review any load recommendations made by CAESAR II.

Note CAESAR II does not recommend any occasional load cases. Definition of these are the responsibility of the user.

If these recommended load cases do not satisfy the analysis requirements, they may always be deleted or modified. Conversely, the load cases may always be reset to the pro-gram’s recommended set at any time.

If the user has an operating temperature below ambient in addition to one above ambient the user should add another expansion load case as follows:

Case # 1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ....

Case # 2 W+D2+T2 +P1+H (OPE) ....

Case # 3 W+P1+H (SUS)....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE

Case # 4L1-L3 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE

Case # 5L2-L3 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE

Case # 6L2-L1 (EXP)....the user should add this since it is not recommended by CAESAR II.



Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection

If spring hangers are to be designed by the program, two additional load cases must first be analyzed in order to obtain the data required to select a variable support. The two basic requirements for sizing hangers are the deadweight carried by the hanger (hot load) and the range of vertical travel to be accommodated. The first load case (traditionally called “Restrained Weight”) consists of only deadweight (W). For this analysis CAESAR II includes a rigid restraint in the vertical direction at every location where a hanger is to be sized. The load on the restraint from this analysis is the deadweight that must be carried by the support in the hot condition. For the second load case, the hanger is replaced with an upward force equal to the calculated hot load, and an operating load case is run. This load case (traditionally called “Free Thermal”) includes the deadweight and thermal effects, the first pressure set (if defined), and any displacements, (W+D1+T1+P1). The vertical dis-placements of the hanger locations, along with the previously calculated deadweights are then passed on to the hanger selection routine. Once the hangers are sized, the added forces are removed and replaced with the selected supports along with their pre-loads (cold loads), designated by load component H. (Note that load component H may appear in the load cases for hanger design if the user has predefined any springs- in this case it would represent the pre-defined operating loads.) CAESAR II then continues with the load case recommendations as defined above. A typical set of recommended load cases for a single operating load case spring hanger design appears as follows:

Case # 1 W ....WEIGHT FOR HANGER LOADS

Case # 2 W+D1+T1+P1 ....OPERATING FOR HANGER TRAVEL

Case # 3 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ...OPERATING (HGRS. INCLUDED

Case # 4 W+P1+H (SUS) ....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE

Case # 5 L3-L4 (EXP) ....EXPANSION LOAD CASE

These hanger sizing load cases (#1 & #2) generally supply no information to the output reports other than the data found in the hanger tables. Note how cases 3, 4, & 5 match the recommended load cases for a standard analysis with one thermal and one pressure defined. Also notice how the displacement combination numbers in case 5 have changed to reflect the new order. If multiple temperatures and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this set after the second spring hanger design load case.

Two other hanger design criteria also affect the recommended load cases. If the “actual cold loads” for selected springs are to be calculated, one additional load case (WNC+H) would appear before case #3 above. If the piping system’s hanger design criteria is set so that the proposed springs must accommodate more than one operating condition, other load cases must additionally appear before the case #3 above. An extra hanger design operating load case must be performed for each additional operating load case used to design springs. Refer to the discussion of the hanger design algorithm for more informa-tion on these options.


�� >,%��$) )��

��%��$) )�� $ �� 2�� )��) � �� +�9��%�'�� 1� � �� +29�� %��) � �� +?�"�#$$�� 9��%��) �� ?

�� )��0��)��%��$) )��5�� 5�� ) �*

Entry Into the Static Output Processor CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Entry Into the Static Output ProcessorWith the completion of a static analysis the CAESAR II output screen automatically appears, allowing interactive review of the analytical results. The static results may also be accessed anytime after the analysis has been completed through the CAESAR II Main Menu option - OUTPUT-STATIC.

Static Output

Once the output processor is invoked, by either of the mentioned paths, the output screen appears. The left-hand column shows the load cases that were analyzed. The center col-umn shows the available reports associated with those load cases. The right-hand column shows reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports, that are not associated with load cases.

Note The proper job must be made current through the File-Open option before select-ing the Static-Output processor through the Main Menu.

7-2 Static Output Processor

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Entry Into the Static Output Processor

Processor Screen

It is from this screen that the user orchestrates all output review activity. The user may

• Interactively review 80 or 132 column terminal reports for any selected combination of load cases and/or report types.

• Print or save to file copies of 80 or 132 column reports for any combination of load cases and/or report types.

• Add Title lines to output reports.

• Review results in a graphical manner.

These functions are described in this chapter. The CAESAR II output processor was designed so that piping results could be quickly reviewed in tabular form, graphically, or using any combination of tabular or graphical approaches.

Static Output Processor 7-3

Entry Into the Static Output Processor CAESAR II - User’s Guide

A number of commands are available:

• File-Open—Opens a different job for output review. The user is prompted for the file to be opened.

• File-Save—Saves the selected reports to a disk file. The user is initially prompted for the file name. Upon closing, or exit, a Table of Contents is added to the file.

• File-Print—Prints the selected reports. Upon closing, or exiting, a Table of Contents is printed. This is described later in the chapter.

• View-Reports—Displays the selected reports on the terminal. This per-mits the analysis data to be reviewed interactively in text format. After selecting the desired combination of one or more active load cases with any combination of report options and executing the View-Reports com-mand, each report is presented one at a time for inspection. Users may scroll through the reports vertically and horizontally where necessary. Specific node numbers or results can be located and highlighted with the

button. To move to the next report the user should close the current report. When all reports have been reviewed, additional report selections may be made.

• Microsoft Word— For those users with access to Microsoft Word, CAESAR II provides the ability to send output reports directly to Word. This permits the use of all of Word’s formatting features (font selection, margin control, etc.) and printer support from the CAESAR II program.

This feature is activated through use of the button when producing a

report. Word is available as an output device to the Static and Dynamic Output Processors. Users can append multiple reports to form a final

report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the button, closing

Word, selecting the next report to be added, clicking the button

again, etc. A table of contents, reflecting the cumulatively produced reports, always appears on the first page of the Word document.

• Select Case Names— This option is also available from the Options menu, it is called Landscape Name. This allows users to select either the CAESAR II default load case names or the user-defined loadcase names for output reports. The user-defined loadcase names are entered in the load case editor under the Load Options tab.

• Animation—Allows the user to view graphic animation of the displace-ment solution.

• Input—Returns to the piping input processor.

• Enter Titles—Allows the user to enter report titles for this group of reports. CAESAR II allows the user to customize the report with a two line title or description. This title may be assigned once for all load case reports sent to the printer or a disk drive; or the title may be changed for each individual report before it is moved to the output device. When CAESAR II receives this command a dialog prompts for the titles.

File - Open

File - Save

File - Print

View - Reports

Microsoft Word

�

Animation

Input

Enter Titles

Select Case Names


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Entry Into the Static Output Processor

Report Titles

Note 28 characters of each entered title line are displayed for 80 column output reports and 50 characters of each entered title line are displayed for 132 column output reports.

• Plot—This command allows the user to superimpose analytical results onto a plot of the system model. This is described in more detail later in the chapter.

• 132 Column Reports—This checkbox selects the 132 column report over the 80 column report. 132 column reports often carry more informa-tion than the 80 column reports, but require compressed fonts or wide paper.

Plot


Report Options CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Report OptionsFor most load cases (except hanger design and fatigue) there are seven different report options that can be selected for review.

Displacements

Translations and rotations for each degree of freedom are reported at each node in the model.

Restraints

Forces and moments on each restraint in the model are reported. There is a separate report generated for each load case selected.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Report Options

Restraint Summary

Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected load cases together on one report.

Global Element Forces

Forces and moments on the piping are reported for each node in the model.



Local Element Forces

These forces and moments have been transferring into the CAESAR II local coordinate system. Refer to the Technical Reference Manual for information on this local coordinate system.



Stresses

SIFs and Code Stresses are reported for each node in the model. The code stresses are compared to the Allowable stress at each node as a percentage. Note that stresses are not computed at nodes on rigid elements.



Sorted Stresses

Bending, Torsion, and Code Stress each are sorted from highest to lowest value with cor-responding node numbers.



Code Compliance Report

Stress checks for multiple load cases may be included in a single report using the Code Compliance report, available from the Static Output processor. For this report, the user selects all load cases of interest, and then highlights Code Compliance under the Report Options. The resultant report shows the stress calculation for all load cases together, on an element-by-element basis.



Cumulative Usage Report

The Cumulative Usage report is available only when there are one or more fatigue-type load cases present. One Cumulative Usage report is generated, regardless of the number of load cases selected, showing the combined impact of simulating selected fatigue loadings.



General Computed Results

Load Case Report

The Load Case Report documents the Basic Names (as built in the Load Case Builder), User-Defined Names, Combination Methods, Load Cycles, and Load Case Options (Out-put Status, Output Type, Snubber Status, Hanger Stiffness Status, and Friction Multiplier) of the static load cases. This report is available from the General computed Results col-umn of the static Output Processor.

Hanger Table with Text

This report provides basic information regarding spring hangers either selected by CAESAR II or the user. Information provided includes the node number, the number of springs required, the hanger table figure number and size, the hot load, the theoretical installed load, which is what the hangers are set to in the field prior to pulling the pins, the actual installed load, which is the load on the hanger when the pipe is empty, the spring rate from the catalog, and the horizontal movement determined from the CAESAR II out-put. If constant effort supports are selected then the hanger constant effort force is reported.



Input Echo

The input echo allows the user to select which portions of the input are to be reported in this output format. All basic element data (geometry), operating conditions, material prop-erties, and boundary conditions are available in this report option.

Miscellaneous Data

This report displays the Allowable Stress Summary, Bend Data, Nozzle Flexibility Data, Pipe Report, Thermal Expansion Coefficients used during analysis, Bill of Materials, the Center of Gravity Report, and Wind and Wave input data.



Warnings

All warnings reported during the error checking process are summarized here.


Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer in either a 132 or 80 column format. To print a hard copy of the reports, Execute the File-Print command. Different combinations of load cases and report types may be chosen, each followed by the File-Print command, to create a single report.

Note Printing will not conclude until the output processor is exited.

Typically, the set of output reports that a user might wish to print out for documentation purposes might be:

Note Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and hanger table with text reports are printed only once even though more than one active load case may be highlighted.

To send reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer, the user should execute the FILE-SAVE command. Upon initial selection, the user is presented with a file dialog to select the name of the file. To change the file name for a new report, the user should select FILE-SAVE AS.

Load Case Report Purpose

SUSTAINED STRESS Code compliance

EXPANSION STRESS Code compliance

OPERATING DISPLACEMENTS Interference checks

OPERATING RESTRAINTS Hot restraint, equipment loads

SUSTAINED RESTRAINTS As-installed restraint, equipment loads

Print

File Save


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File

Save As Dialog

All reports that are to be saved in the output file need not be declared at one time. Subse-quent reports sent to the file during the session are appended to the file started in the ses-sion. (These output files are only closed and overwritten when a new output device, such as a printer, or another file, is defined.)

Upon closing a series of reports, either to the printer or a file, a Table of Contents is printed

Note The signs in all the CAESAR II reports show the forces and moments that act “ON” something. The element force/moment report shows the forces and moments that act “ON” each element to keep that element in static equilibrium. The restraint force/moment report shows the forces and moments that act “ON” each restraint.


Notes on Plotting Static Results CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Notes on Plotting Static ResultsThe static results may be reviewed graphically by executing the plot commands with any active load case selected.

The CAESAR II output plotting is quite comprehensive. The new user is encouraged to liberally experiment with all output options, noting which in particular seems most appro-priate for a given application.

Output Graphics Screen

The output graphics are very similar to input graphics. In addition, calculated results may be displayed on the plot. While in the output plotting mode,

• Displaced shapes may be shown for the final loaded condition or may be shown in progressive steps as the system is loaded.

• Displacements along any global axis can be sorted and displayed. Values are printed one at a time from the largest to the smallest.

• Symbolic or numeric forces, moments, and stresses may be superimposed on the dis-placed shape plot.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Notes on Plotting Static Results

• Restraints, and their line of action, can be shown graphically or numerically on the displayed plot.

• Hard copies of the graphics may be sent to a printer from the plot menu directly.

• Maximum SIFs, and section modulus can be displayed on the plotted geometry.

• Force, moment, and stress data can be sorted and displayed from the largest to the smallest, and can be plotted symbolically as variable size arrowheads or explosion symbols.

• Any number of different load cases can be reviewed without leaving the plot mode. The current load case to be processed is set via the Load Case drop down.

“SHOWing” Results on the Plot

The variety of CAESAR II output plot functions are accessed from the Show menu. This menu is broken into submenus - these are Displacements, Restraints, Forces/Moments and Stress. These are described below:

Main Show Menu

Output Plot Show Menu

Displacement Sub Menu:

Deflected Shape—Overlays the scaled deflected shape of the displayed geometry onto the current plot for the currently selected load case.

Grow—Shows progressive displaced shapes of the geometry on the current plot, for the currently selected load case.

Scale—Lets the user specify the deflected shape plot scale factor.

Maximum Displacement X—Allows the user to put the actual magnitude for X dis-placements on the currently displayed geometry. It starts with highest for given direc-tion, then puts 2nd, 3rd highest, etc., until the user escapes.

Maximum Displacement Y—Allows the user to put the actual magnitude for Y dis-placements on the currently displayed geometry. It starts with highest for given direc-tion, then puts 2nd, 3rd highest, etc., until the user escapes.

Maximum Displacement Z—Allows the user to put the actual magnitude for Z dis-placements on the currently displayed geometry. It starts with highest for given direc-tion, then puts 2nd, 3rd highest, etc., until the user escapes.



Restraints Sub Menu:

Restraints—Puts restraint symbols on the displayed plot. Restraints are plotted as arrow heads, with the direction of the arrow indicating the direction of the force exerted by the restraint on the piping system.

Hangers—Puts restraint symbols on the plot indicating the action of the spring hang-ers.

Scale—Allows the user to specify the scale at which the restraint symbols are plotted.

Forces-X—Puts the magnitudes of the FX restraint loads on the plot.

Forces-Y—Puts the magnitudes of the FY restraint loads on the plot.

Forces-Z—Puts the magnitudes of the FZ restraint loads on the plot.

Moments-X—Puts the magnitude of the MX restraint loads on the plot.

Moments-Y—Puts the magnitude of the MY restraint loads on the plot.

Moments-Z—Puts the magnitude of the MZ restraint loads on the plot.

Forces/Moments Sub Menu:

Forces-X—Displays all of the element forces acting in the X direction on the plot.

Forces-Y—Displays all of the element forces acting in the Y direction on the plot.

Forces-Z—Displays all of the element forces acting in the Z direction on the plot.

Moment-X—Displays all of the element moments acting in the X direction on the plot.

Moment-Y—Displays all of the element moments acting in the Y direction on the plot.

Moment-Z—Displays all of the element moments acting in the Z direction on the plot.

Maximum-FX—Sorts all elemental forces acting in the X direction and prints them one at a time from the highest to the lowest. Forces are displayed one at a time until the user escapes.

Maximum-FY—Sorts all elemental moments acting in the Y direction and prints them one at a time from the highest to the lowest. Forces are displayed one at a time until the user escapes.

Maximum-FZ—Sorts all elemental forces acting in the Z direction and prints them one at a time from the highest to the lowest. Forces are displayed one at a time until the user escapes.

Maximum-MX—Sorts all elemental moments acting in the X direction moments and prints them one at a time from the highest to the lowest. Moments are displayed one at a time until the user escapes.

Maximum-MY—Sorts all elemental moments acting in the Y direction moments and prints them one at a time from the highest to the lowest. Moments are displayed one at a time until the user escapes.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Notes on Plotting Static Results

Maximum-MZ—Sorts all elemental moments acting in the Z direction moments and prints them one at a time from the highest to the lowest. Moments are displayed one at a time until the user escapes.

Symbol-FX—Puts arrowhead symbols on the plot with a size relative to the magni-tude of the X direction force acting on the element at that point. The user is given the opportunity to alter the scaled symbol size.

Symbol-FY—Puts arrowhead symbols on the plot with a size relative to the magni-tude of the Y direction force acting on the element at that point. The user is given the opportunity to alter the scaled symbol size.

Symbol-FZ—Puts arrowhead symbols on the plot with a size relative to the magni-tude of the Z direction force acting on the element at that point. The user is given the opportunity to alter the scaled symbol size.

Symbol-MX—Puts arrowhead symbols on the plot with a size relative to the magni-tude of the X direction moments acting on the element at that point. The user is given the opportunity to alter the scaled symbol size.

Symbol-MY—Puts arrowhead symbols on the plot with a size relative to the magni-tude of the Y direction moments acting on the element at that point. The user is given the opportunity to alter the scaled symbol size.

Symbol-MZ—Puts arrowhead symbols on the plot with a size relative to the magni-tude of the Z direction moments acting on the element at that point. The user is given the opportunity to alter the scaled symbol size.



Stress Sub Menu:

Overstress—Displays overstressed points and their magnitude. Overstressed condi-tions are only detected for load cases where a code compliance check was done (i.e., where there are allowable stresses available).

Maximum—Displays stresses one at a time from the largest to the smallest values, until the user escapes.

Bending—Displays all bending stresses on the displayed geometry.

Torsional—Displays all the torsional stresses on the displayed geometry.

Axial—Displays all the axial stresses on the displayed geometry.

Code—Displays all calculated code stress values on the displayed geometry.

Symbol Bending—Puts explosion symbols on the plot with a size proportional to stress at the point. The user is given the opportunity to alter the scaled symbol size.

Symbol Torsional—Same as above, for torsional stress.

Symbol Axial—Same as above, for axial stress.

Symbol Code—Same as above, for code stress.

Color-Bending—Plots the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corre-sponds to the value of the bending stress (colors and corresponding stress levels are set in the Configuration/Setup module).

Color-Torsional—Plots the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corre-sponds to the value of the torsional stress (colors and corresponding stress levels are set in the Configuration/Setup module).

Color-Axial—Plots the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corre-sponds to the value of the axial stress (colors and corresponding stress levels are set in the Configuration/Setup module).

Color-Code—Plots the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corre-sponds to the value of the bending stress (colors and corresponding stress levels are set in the Configuration/Setup module).

SIF—Displays the maximum stress intensification factor for each element on the dis-played plot.

Section Modulus—Displays the section modulus of each element on the plot.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide 3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor

3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output ProcessorThe Static Output Processor Graphics Engine is used to review the analytic results in graphical mode. The Static Output Processor provides two types of graphics: the tradi-tional CAESAR II (standard) graphics as well as the newer 3D/HOOPS Graphics. Use of the "new" 3D/HOOPS Graphics engine is recommended whenever possible. The original "standard" graphics is available because not all its capabilities are implemented in the 3D/HOOPS Graphics.

The Static Output 3D Graphics Engine has the same general capabilities as the Piping Input Processor’s Graphics. It has the same HOOPS standard toolbar that allows, along with other options, zooming, orbiting, and panning, has options of switching among dif-ferent orthographic views and volume to single line modes.

Additional capabilities of the Static Output Graphics Engine can be found on the Output Toolbar and include the display of displaced shapes, highlighting and zooming to maxi-mum displacements, restraint loads, and stresses of the model. The major advantage of the 3D Graphics over the original standard CAESAR II graphics is the graphical distribution of stresses with color, by value and by percent.

Output Toolbar

The CAESAR II Output Graphics Engine is quite comprehensive. Users are encouraged to liberally experiment with all the output options, noting which ones in particular could be most appropriate for a given application. Most of the output options are discussed below.

The variety of CAESAR II output plot functions are accessed from the Show menu that is broken into sub-menus Displacements, Restraints, Forces/Moments, and Stresses. Alter-natively, these functions can be activated by clicking the appropriate buttons.

Deflected ShapeClicking the Deflected Shape button overlays the scaled deflected shape of the displayed geometry with a different color into the current plot for the currently selected load case. Clicking the arrow to the right of this button will display an additional menu with two choices: Show Deflected Shape and Adjust Deflection Scale. Selecting the Adjust Deflec-tion Scale option lets the user specify the deflected shape plot scale factor. Entering a value that is low scale may prevent visual distinction of the deflected shape from the orig-inal model. Entering a scale value that is too large may graphically "break" or discontinue the model depending on the geometry complexity.

Alternatively, the same option may be accessed from the Show menu, by selecting Dis-placement/Deflected Shape option.


3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Maximum DisplacementsClicking one of the buttons allows the user to put the actual magnitude for X, Y, or Z dis-placements on the currently displayed geometry. The element containing the displaced node is highlighted, and the camera viewpoint is repositioned (preserving the optical dis-tance to the model) to bring the displaced node to the center of the view. It starts with highest value for the given direction, upon pressing the Enter button, the 2nd, 3rd highest, etc. values will be placed in the similar manner until all values are exhausted or become zero. Clicking the button again will clear the view of the displayed values and highlight-ing.

Alternatively, the same options may be accessed from the Show menu, by selecting Dis-placement/Maximum Displacement/(X, Y, or Z) options.

Zoom to SelectionThe Zoom to Selection button enables users to highlight element and zoom to it by click-ing. To zoom out, in order to preserve the current model state and highlight, users should click the Zoom button. The Zoom to Extents button ... does what? may also be used. The reason behind the lack of an automated zoom-out tool is that it is not obvious where to "zoom out" to for a large model you may not want to zoom too far away to "lose" the high-lighted element from the view.

Whenever the Zoom to Selection button is clicked, all the consecutive highlighting opera-tions (such as Max Displacements, or Max Restraint Loads, etc.) will zoom to the newly highlighted element. Clicking the button again will turn the zoom option off: the high-lighted element will still be moved to the view, but the optical distance from the camera view point to the model will stay the same.

Show Event Viewer GridThe Show Event Viewer Grid button displays a summarized review of displacements, restraints and stresses for all valid/ analyzed load cases in the model. Clicking this button causes the Event Viewer dialog to appear for the current load case (selected in the Load Cases drop-down box), with the corresponding report highlighted. The actual report will depend on the output show function (highlighting operation) used last. For example, if one of the Maximum Displacements (X, Y, or Z) options is currently active or was last used, the displayed report will be the Displacements Report for the current load case with corre-sponding displacements column highlighted; if one of the Restraint Loads (discussed later) options is currently active or was last used, the displayed report will be the Restraints Report with corresponding column highlighted; etc. If none of the highlighted operations was previously used, the default report shown will be Stresses Report for cur-rently selected load case.

The Event Viewer dialog is also used in conjunction with the Select by Single Click button. When the Select by Single Click mode is active, actually clicking on an element highlights it and brings up the Event Viewer dialog with the corresponding element highlighted in the report grid.

One of the advantages of the Event Viewer Grid dialog is its ability to navigate among the elements, navigate to various reports within a load case, and even viewing the reports for other load cases. This is done in the Report Selection window on the left in the dialog. This window has a tree structure similar in operation to Windows Explorer. Clicking the "plus"



sign for a particular load case will expand the tree of its reports. Selecting the report will display the data in the grid view to the right. Selecting a node or an element in the grid view (when Select by Single Click is enabled) will highlight the corresponding element on the graphics view, and will zoom to the selected element if the corresponding Zoom to Selection is enabled. Similarly, clicking an element on the graphics view will highlight the corresponding data row in the report view of the Event Viewer dialog. Thus, this is a bidi-rectional connection.

Changing the load case within the Event Viewer Grid dialog will update the graphics view (if applicable) and the load case selection drop-down box on the toolbar.

Maximum Restraints LoadsThe Show Maximum Restraint Loads: Forces FX, FY, FZ, or Moments MX, MY, MZ buttons allow the user to place the actual magnitude of the calculated restraint loads (cor-responding to the particular button) for a selected load case on the currently displayed geometry. This button displays the load magnitude value next to the node, the element containing the node is highlighted and is brought to the center of the graphics view. The Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options are still available at the discretion of the user. After pressing the Enter button, the 2nd, the 3rd, and any remaining values will be placed in the similar manner.

OverstressThe Overstress button allows the user to view the model’s overstressed point distribution for a particular load case. The nodes with calculated a "code stress to allowable stress ratio" of 100% or more display in red; the remaining nodes/elements display in the color selected for the lowest percent ratio. This feature is useful to quickly observe the over-stressed areas in the model.

Note Overstressed conditions are only detected for load cases where a code compliance check was done (i.e., where there are allowable stresses available).

Note Overstressed nodes will display in red in the Event Viewer Grid (if it is enabled).

Note The model is still fully functional, it can be zoomed, panned, or rotated at the dis-cretion of the user.

Maximum Code Stress

The Max Code Stress button allows the user to display the stress magnitudes in descending order one at a time. This button operation is similar to the Maximum Displacement button, the stress value is displayed the next to the node, the element containing the node is high-lighted and is moved to the center of the view. The Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options are still available at the discretion of the user. After pressing the Enter


3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor CAESAR II - User’s Guide

button the 2nd, the 3rd, etc. highest value is placed in the similar manner with correspond-ing element highlighting.

In addition to the "dry" numbers that could be found in a corresponding report, this option gives the user graphical representation and distribution of large calculated code stresses throughout the system.

Code Stress Colors by ValueThe Stress Colors by Value button displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a certain boundary value of the code stress. This is used to quickly see the distribution of the code stresses in the model for a particular load case. In addition to the model color highlight in the graphics view, the corresponding color key legend window is displayed in the top left corner of the graphics view. The legend window can be resized and moved away from the view at the user’s discretion.

The colors and corresponding stress levels can be set in the Configuration/Setup module, on the Plot Colors tab.

Code Stress Colors by PercentThe Stress Colors by Percent button displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a certain percent ratio of code stress to allowable stress. This option is only valid for load cases where a code compliance check was done (i.e., where there are allowable stresses available).

This option is similar to the Stress Colors by Value option and is generally used to quickly see the distribution of the code stress to allowable ratios in the model for a particular load case. The legend window with the corresponding color keys is also displayed in the left upper corner of the graphics view. The legend window can be resized and moved away from the view at the user’s discretion.

Clicking the arrow to the right of this button displays an additional menu with two options: Display and Adjust Settings. Selecting the Display option displays the color distri-bution. Selecting the Adjust Settings option displays the Stress Settings dialog where desired values and corresponding colors could be set or adjusted. These settings are related to the particular job they are set for and are saved in the corresponding job_name.XML file in the current job data directory (see 3D/HOOPS Graphics in Piping Input Processor, 3D Graphics Configuration chapter for more information on the *.XML file).



Code Stress Colors by Percent


Notes on Animation of Static Results CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Notes on Animation of Static ResultsCAESAR II allows the user to view the piping system as it moves to the displaced posi-tion of the basic load cases. To animate the static results, execute the View-Animate com-mand. The following screen appears:

Animated Graphic Screen

The animated plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the commands to activate the animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume Motion produces volume graphics. The desired load case may be selected from the drop down list. Animations may be sped up or slowed down or stopped using the toolbars.


�� ?,"��( )��

��"�� %��(( �� $'��'��0��"�� ( )�� 2( )�$'��'��0�;�� 3#�� ++��7)�.��@% ��)�=�� +!�� @% ��)�=�� 4"�1�% ��)�� +��#��/% )��1 �0��@% ��)�= �� &��#�� 2��#�� 6��A�� 3

�� <��"�� ( )��'�� *

Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR IIThe dynamic analysis capabilities found in CAESAR II include natural frequency calcu-lations, harmonic analysis, response spectrum analysis, and time history analysis. Included with the CAESAR II dynamic modules are processors which can generate several types of dynamic loads. An example is the processor which converts loading with respect to time into a force response spectrum. This ability to define different types of dynamic effects improves the accuracy of dynamic modelling and makes these methods suitable for a wider range of dynamic problems.

Natural frequency information can indicate the tendency of a piping system to respond to dynamic loads. A system’s modal natural frequencies typically should not be too close to equipment operating frequencies and, as a general rule, higher natural frequencies usually cause less trouble than low natural frequencies. CAESAR II provides both calculation of a system’s modal natural frequencies, as well as animated plots of the associated mode shapes.

CAESAR II also provides for the analysis of dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature. Applications of harmonic analyses include fluid pulsation in reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads are modeled as concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper phase relation-ship between multiple loads a phase angle can also be associated with these forces or dis-placements. Any number of forcing frequencies may be analyzed allowing easy analysis of equipment start-up, and any normal operating modes. Harmonic responses represent the maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system undergoes and have the same form as a static analysis - node deflections and rotations, local forces and moments, restraint loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement at node 45 of 5.8 cm. then the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation would be from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at this point in the system. The stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range.

The third type of dynamic analysis available in CAESAR II is the response spectrum method. The response spectrum method allows an impulse type transient event to be char-acterized by a response vs. frequency spectra. Each mode of vibration of the piping system is related to one response on the spectrum. These modal responses are summed together to produce the total system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the sus-tained stresses, should be compared to the occasional stress allowables defined by the pip-ing code. Spectral analysis can be used in a wide variety of applications. Ground motion associated with a seismic event is supplied as displacement, velocity, or acceleration response spectra. The assumption is that all the supports move with the defined ground motion and the piping system “catches up” to the supports; it is this inertial effect which loads the system. The shock spectra which define the ground motion may vary between the three global directions and may even change for different groups of supports (indepen-dent as opposed to uniform support motion). Another response spectrum application is based on single point loading rather than a uniform inertial loading. CAESAR II makes effective use of this technique to analyze a wide variety of impulse type transient loads. Relief valve loads, water hammer loads, slug flow loads, and rapid valve closure type loads all cause single impulse dynamic loads at various points in the piping system. The response to these dynamic forces can be confidently and conservatively predicted using the force spectrum method.

8-2 Dynamic Input and Analysis

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II

The fourth type of dynamic analysis is time history analysis. This is one of the most accu-rate methods, in that it uses numeric integration of the dynamic equation of motion to sim-ulate the system response throughout the load duration. CAESAR II’s time history analysis method can solve any type of dynamic loading, but due to its exact solution, requires more resources (memory, calculation speed and time) than other methods. There-fore, it may not pay to use this method when, for example the spectrum method offers suf-ficient accuracy.

Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis

The dynamic techniques employed by CAESAR II require strict linearity in the piping and structural systems. Dynamic responses associated with nonlinear effects are not addressed. An example of a nonlinear effect is “slapping”, such as when a pipe lifts off the rack at one moment and impacts the rack the next. For the dynamic model the pipe must be either held down or allowed to move freely. The nonlinear restraints used in the static analysis must be set to be active or inactive for the dynamic analysis. CAESAR II allows the user to set the nonlinear restraints to any configuration found in the static results (this is done by specifying the number of the Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Sta-tus). Most often the user selects the operating case to set the nonlinear restraint con-figuration. For example, if a +Y support is active in the static operating case (normally case 1 or 3), and the operating case is used to set the status of the nonlinear supports for dynamics, CAESAR II installs a double-acting Y support at that location for the dynamic analysis. The pipe will not move up or down at that point regardless of the dynamic load or tendency to move.

Dynamic Input and Analysis 8-3

Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Control Parameters

A second “nonlinear” effect is friction. Friction effects must also be “linearized” for use in dynamic analysis. By default, CAESAR II excludes the effects of friction from the dynamic analysis. If requested, CAESAR II can approximate the friction resistance to movement in the dynamic model by including spring stiffness normal to the restraint line of action. For a Y restraint with friction, the friction stiffness would be added in the X and Z directions. The stiffness of the these springs is a user-defined function of the friction load calculated in the static analysis. CAESAR II computes the friction stiffness by multi-plying the normal force on the restraint from the selected static case results, by the friction coefficient, and by the user defined Stiffness Factor for Friction. For example, if the nor-mal force on the restraint from the static analysis is 350 lb., the friction coefficient (mu) is 0.3, and the user defined Stiffness Factor for Friction is 50.0, then springs having a stiff-ness of 350 * 0.3 * 50.0 = 5250 lb./in. are inserted into the dynamic model in the two directions perpendicular to the friction restraint’s line of action. Converting friction damp-ing into a stiffness is usually not mathematically legitimate, but can serve as a good engi-neering approximation for dynamic friction in a wide variety of situations.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II

Major Steps in Dynamics Input

Developing dynamic input for CAESAR II comprises four basic steps:

1. Specifying the load(s)

2. Modifying the mass and stiffness model

3. Setting the parameters that control the analysis

4. Starting and error checking the analysis

Except for starting the analysis, these steps may occur in any order. Due to the amount of data which may be specified, it is best to establish some sort of pattern in defining the input.

There is no reason to specify dynamic loads if only natural frequencies are to be counted or calculated. Harmonic analysis requires the input of driving frequencies and forces or displacements to define and locate the sinusoidally varying point loads. Creating the dynamic loads for spectra or time history analysis requires the most attention by the user. The response spectra or time history profile must be defined, built, or selected. Force sets must be built for force response spectra and time history analysis. Response spectra /time history (and force sets) are combined with other data to build the load cases to be ana-lyzed. Finally, additional load cases may be constructed by combining shock results with static results to check code compliance on occasional stresses. CAESAR II provides sev-eral processors to simplify many of these tasks.

For dynamic analysis, CAESAR II converts each piping element from a continuous beam element between two nodes to a stiffness between two masses. Additional stiffness are added at the mass (node) points to model anchors, restraints, hangers, and other supports in the static analysis model. The masses assigned to each node are one half the sum of all element masses framing into the node. These masses are used as translational inertias only. Rotational moments of inertia are ignored in the dynamic mass model. (Their inclusion in the analysis would cause a large increase in solution time without a corresponding improvement in the general accuracy of the analysis.)

In many instances the mass and stiffness established in the static model will be used with-out modification in the dynamic analysis. Some situations, however, can be improved by the deletion of mass points or degrees of freedom. Usually this occurs in analyses where the “unnecessary” masses are far from the area of interest in the model or where the “unnecessary” degrees of freedom do not act in the direction of interest. Some piping sys-tems have supports that are installed to suppress vibration and do not effect the static anal-ysis. These shock absorbers or snubbers can be entered (if not entered in statics) during the dynamic input as additional stiffness.

The major function of the control parameter list is to set the type of analysis to be per-formed: calculation of natural frequencies and mode shapes, harmonic analysis, spectral analysis, or time history. General settings for the analysis are also defined in the control parameter list such as maximum frequency cutoff and mode summation methods. It is here, too, that the static configuration for nonlinear restraints (if any) is defined, and the friction factor for including friction in the dynamic run is entered (the default friction fac-tor is 0.0, which implies that no friction stiffness will be used). The advanced option allows the user to change the parameters governing the eigensolution (which does the modal extraction). These parameters should only be altered under the rarest circum-stances.


Overview of the Dynamic Analysis Input Processor CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Overview of the Dynamic Analysis Input Processor

Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu

The dynamic input module allows the user to specify the dynamic loads imposed on the piping system.

To perform a dynamic analysis, the static model must first be created and error checked through the CAESAR II input processor. Usually the model is also run through static analysis before the dynamic analysis begins but this is not a requirement unless nonlinear supports or hanger selections are included in the model. If nonlinear supports are present the static analysis must be run and the results made available before the dynamic analysis can be performed.

To enter the dynamics input, the proper job name must be current prior to selecting the Analysis-Dynamics file options of the Main Menu.

Analysis-Dynamics Option

Upon entering the dynamic input processor, the following screen appears.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Overview of the Dynamic Analysis Input Processor

Dynamic Input Processor

The type of analysis is indicated in the drop down list in the upper left portion of the screen (new jobs default to Other). Input data is organized in pages according to type. The pages can be accessed by selecting their title tabs. After data is entered, the job can be saved, error checked only, or analyzed, using the menu commands or toolbars.

A variety of dynamic analysis options are available and require different types of input. To simplify the input process, the user should select the analysis from the droplist. Once selected, the input screen changes to reflect the required inputs.

Dynamic Analysis Type Specification


Overview of the Dynamic Analysis Input Processor CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Available commands during dynamic input processing are:

File-Save Input—Saves the current input data.

File-Check Input—Checks the input data for errors or inconsistencies.

File-Run Analysis— Starts the dynamic analysis.

Edit-Add Entry—Adds a new data line on the current input page (tab page).

Edit-Delete Entry—Deletes the selected data lines on the current input page.

DLF Spectrum Generator—Allows the user to generate a file containing a Dynamic Load Factor vs. Frequency Spectrum from a Force vs. Time profile.

Tools-Relief Load Synthesis—Provides a utility for estimating loads, flows, and other results for gas or liquid relief valves.

Tools-Spectrum Data Points—Used to enter data points for user-defined spectra.

File-Save Input

File-Check Input

File-Run Analysis

Edit-Add Entry

Edit-Delete Entry

DLF Spectrum Generator

Tools-Relief Load Synthesis

Tools-Spectrum Data Points


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Input Overview Based on Analysis Category

Input Overview Based on Analysis CategoryThe multitude of dynamic analysis types available in CAESAR II can be somewhat intim-idating at first. Selection of Analysis Type from the pull down list displays only those tabs for which input is appropriate. Those items are discussed by analysis type.

Modal

Specifying the Loads

Modal analysis simply extracts natural frequencies and shapes for the system’s modes of vibration. Therefore no loadings need to be or may be specified.

Lumped Masses

On this page, the user may add or delete mass from the mass model. Extra mass which may have been ignored as insignificant in the static model (e.g. a flange pair) can be directly entered here. Also, weights modeled as downward acting concentrated forces must be added here (CAESAR II does not assume that concentrated forces are system weights, i.e., forces due to gravity acting on a mass). Masses may also be deleted from the static mass model; this is the same as deleting degrees-of-freedom. For the most part, mass deletion is a tool used to economize the analysis. If the system response to some dynamic load is isolated to specific sections of the piping system, other sections of the system may be removed from the dynamic model by removing their mass. Mass can also be deleted selectively for any of the three global coordinate directions when deletion of directional degrees-of-freedom is desired.

For example, if a piping system includes a structural frame which supports the weight (the piping rests on the structure and is connected to the structure only in the Y direction), these two systems (piping and structure) are independent of each other in the X and Z directions, so the X and Z mass of the structure can be removed without affecting the pip-ing model’s results. With the X and Z masses removed, the calculations for the piping structural model proceed much faster.


Input Overview Based on Analysis Category CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Snubbers

Snubbers

Certain supports, called snubbers, only resist dynamic loading, while allowing static dis-placement, such as that due to thermal growth. It is on this page that snubbers can be included in the model. Snubbers must have their stiffness explicitly entered (they do not default to rigid, since snubbers are typically not as stiff as other types of restraints).

Note Snubbers may also be entered in the input processor rather than in the dynamic processor.

Control Parameters

Control Parameters

These parameters describe how the analysis will be conducted. In general, this page would be used to set the number of modes of vibration to extract by specifying a maximum num-ber, a cutoff frequency, or both. Details on these entries are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.

Advanced Parameters Show Screen

These parameters rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information, see the Technical Reference Manual.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Harmonic

Harmonic


Harmonic Loads - Excitation Frequency

Harmonic load definition is broken down into two parts: 1) definition of the excitation fre-quency or frequencies and 2) location and magnitude of the force and/or displacement load(s). Three input tabs are available for specifying the loads.

Any number of individual frequencies, or frequency ranges (indicated by a starting, end-ing, and incremental frequency) may be specified, one to a line. CAESAR II performs a separate analysis for each frequency requested.

Note The number of anticipated load cycles may be entered for each frequency range. If the number is entered, the load cases are calculated with a fatigue stress type. Oth-erwise, the load cases are calculated with an occasional stress type.

Harmonic loads may be specified on the Harmonic Forces or Harmonic Displacements input tabs. These pages allow the user to enter loads (either force or displacement), direc-tion, phase angle and node(s).

Harmonic Forces


Harmonic CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Harmonic Displacements

Phasing can be important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle (entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load to another. For example, if two harmonic loads are acting along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed towards each other (i.e. in opposite directions), which would produce no net dynamic imbalance on the system, or the loads could be directed in the same direction (i.e. to the right or to the left together), which would produce a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. It is the phase angle which primarily determines this relationship. The harmonic load data

1500 X 0 10

1500 X 0 105

produces an “in phase,” or same direction dynamic load in the system (1500 lbf. in the X direction and zero phase at nodes 10 and 105), while

1500 X 0 10

1500 X 180 105

produces an “out of phase,” or opposite direction dynamic load on the system which will tend to pull the system apart. The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating pumps.

Rotating equipment may have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be converted into a harmonic load that acts on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The magnitude of the harmonic load is computed from:

Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity),

where (speed) is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90º phase shift.

In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some regular interval that is related to the valving inside the pump and the pump speed. This pressure wave moves away from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves will cause loads at each bend in the piping system. The load on each sub-sequent elbow in the system starting from the first elbow will be phase shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows, from the first elbow to the current elbow. It is the amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs that produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the first elbow, is calculated from

phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360º


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Harmonic

where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the dis-tance from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at each elbow is

Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)

Note All specified loads are considered to act together (with phasing considerations) at each applied frequency.

Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model

Lumped masses and snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Anal-ysis.

Control Parameters

Harmonic Control Parameters

These parameters describe how the analysis will be conducted. Undamped harmonic anal-ysis may be done by setting damping to 0.0. Details of these fields are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.


Earthquake (Spectrum) CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Earthquake (Spectrum)


Earthquake loads are defined by defining one or more response spectra and applying them in a specified direction over part or all of the piping system.

Spectrum Definitions

Response spectrum table values can be entered directly or built and stored as a file for use by CAESAR II. Data stored in a file can be referenced by any job run on the machine. In either case, for a response table to be used by CAESAR II it must first be defined in the Spectrum Definitions page.

There are two parts to the shock definition - 1) the statement of the name and type of data and 2) the table of actual spectrum data points. The Spectrum Wizard also serves this pur-pose -providing the spectrum definitions and data points. If the spectrum data is to be read from a file, the second part of the shock definition is not necessary. Spectrum Definition describes the type of data in the spectrum (period or frequency vs. Force Multiplier/DLF, Acceleration, Velocity, or Displacement) as well as the interpolation method for each axis. In order to define a spectrum, the user should add a blank line.

Note To indicate that the spectrum is to be read from a file the symbol “#” should immediately proceed the spectrum name. (The name of the file is the name of the spectrum, without the “#” symbol, and no extension is allowed.) Subsequent ref-erences to that spectrum do not use the “#” symbol.

Note The Spectrum Wizard automates common shock definitions, for more information refer to the DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard section later in this chapter.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Earthquake (Spectrum)

If not read in from a file, the data points for a user-entered spectrum may be entered by using the Tools - Spectrum Data Points command, selecting the spectrum name, and entering the data.

Likewise, pressing the Read From File button will read in data from any text file set up with two entries per range.

Data Points

CAESAR II also has several shock spectra built in. These spectra may be used as part of a shock load case without further input.

ELCENTRO - Based on the May 18, 1940 El Centro California earthquake N-S com-ponent, and applies to elastic systems with 5-10% damping. Values are taken from Biggs - Introduction to Structural Dynamics.

1.60H.5 - U. S. Atomic Energy Commission Regulatory Guide 1.60 Rev. 1, Dec. 1973 Horizontal Design Response Spectra for 0.5% critically damped systems.

1.60H2 - Other AEC horizontal spectra for 2, 5, 7 and 10% critically damped systems.

1.60H5

1.60H7

1.60H10

1.60V.5 - Other AEC vertical spectra for 0.5, 2, 5, 7 and 10% critically damped sys-tems.

1.60V2

1.60V5

Spectrum Data Points



1.60V7

1.60V10

UBCSOIL1 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991, soil type 1

UBCSOIL2 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991 soil type 2

UBCSOIL3 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991 soil type 3

Note Use of the Reg. Guide 1.60 or UBC spectra requires the input of the ZPA (zero period acceleration) in the Control Parameters. This is the maximum ground acceleration at the site and is used to scale the spectrum curves. The default ZPA is 0.5g.

Spectrum Load Cases

Spectrum Load Cases

Load cases consist of simultaneously applied spectra. Each spectrum in the shock case is assigned a direction and factor. For earthquakes, the “direction” input defines the orienta-tion of the uniform inertial loading (commonly earthquakes have 3 direction components: X, Y, and Z). The “factor” is used to modify the magnitude of the shock. For example, the seismic evaluation of a piping system might include two Spectrum/Time History Load



Cases: 1) 1.0 (100%) times of the El Centro spectrum in the X direction and 0.67 (67%) times of the El Centro spectrum in the Y direction and 2) 1.0 in Z and 0.67 in Y.

CAESAR II also supports options for independent support motion earthquakes. Here, parts of the system are exposed to different shocks. An example is a piping system sup-ported both from ground and building supports. Because the building will filter the earth-quake, supports attached to the building will not be exposed to the same shock as the supports attached to the ground. In this case two different shock inputs are required, one for the ground supports, and one for the building supports. To specify an independent sup-port motion shock the node range that defines a particular group of supports must be given. Additionally, the maximum displacement (seismic anchor movements) of the sup-port attachment point must be specified.

The example below shows first a typical uniform support earthquake specification, and second a typical independent support motion earthquake:

* UNIFORM SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUTELCENTRO 1 XELCENTRO 1 ZELCENTRO .667 Y

* INDEPENDENT SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUTHGROUND 1 X 1 100 1 0.25HGROUND 1 Z 1 100 1 0.25VGROUND 1 Y 1 100 1 0.167HBUILDING 1 X 101 300 1 0.36HBUILDING 1 Z 101 300 1 0.36VBUILDING 1 Y 101 300 1 0.24

The uniform support motion earthquake above contains only components of the El Centro earthquake acting uniformly through all of the supports. There is a 33% reduction in the earthquake’s magnitude in the Y direction.

The independent support motion earthquake above has two different support groups: the 1-100 group, and the 101-300 group. The 1-100 group are exposed to a ground spectrum. The 101-300 group are exposed to a building spectrum. Different horizontal and vertical components were given for both the ground and the building spectra. The last values spec-ified are the seismic support movements.

Stress types may be assigned to the spectrum load cases by selecting from the drop list. If the Fatigue stress type is selected, the user should also enter the number of anticipated load cycles.



Static/Dynamic Combinations


Each shock case produces an output report listing displacements, forces, moments, and stresses. For stresses, however, most piping codes combine the occasional dynamic stresses with the sustained static stresses. It is the sustained plus occasional stress sum that is compared to the occasional allowable stress. This occasional stress combination is pro-vided through the Static/Dynamic Combinations page. Each combination references the static load case number and the dynamic load case number to be combined. The static load case number identifies one of the static load cases (usually the sustained case) in the static output. In most cases this is static load case 4 if hanger sizing is included, or load case 2 if it is not. The numbers used to reference the dynamic cases are set by the order of the dynamic load case input. Factors are specified with the static and dynamic case numbers to increase or decrease the summed values. Any static/dynamic combination specified will produce an additional dynamic output report. There can be any number of static or dynamic loads summed together in a single load case. Each case to be added should be placed on a separate line. Both static only and dynamic only cases can be manipulated. There is also independent control of the combination method. SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of the Squares) methods or ABS methods can be used. The default is the ABS method. The input to sum 100% (1.0 times) of static case 2 with 100% (1.0 times) dynamic case 1 appears as follows:



S2 1.0

D1 1.0


Lumped Masses and Snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.

Control Parameters

These parameters describe how the analysis is to be conducted. Particular attention should be paid to the modal summation methodology Details are discussed in the Technical Ref-erence Manual.

Advanced Parameters

These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information see the Technical Ref-erence Manual.


Relief Loads (Spectrum) CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Relief Loads (Spectrum)


This method is set up to solve a relief valve loading through Force Spectrum Methodol-ogy. In order to analyze a piping system for a relief valve loading, it is first necessary to estimate the force-time profile for the loading. This must then be converted to a Force Multiplier (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum. The applied force then must be applied in conjunction with this spectrum.

Relief Load Synthesis


If the user does not know the characteristics of the relief valve load, the Tools-Relief Load Synthesis Command provides a calculation scratch pad based upon a model of a relief valve venting steam or liquid to atmosphere. This utility can be used to estimate relief valve thrust loads, exit velocities, and pressures which can in turn be used to estimate the force vs. time profile of the applied load. Once all data is entered, pressing the Calculate Results button performs the calculations. For more information, see the Technical Refer-ence Manual.

Means of estimating the Force-Time profile for a relief load are shown in the Applica-tions Guide.



CAESAR II - User’s Guide DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard

DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum WizardSeveral common shock definitions are based on just a few parameters. Supplying these parameters to the DLF/Spectrum Generator or Spectrum Wizard will produce these shock definitions. Three sources for seismic spectra are used - the Uniform Building Code, ASCE 7 and the International Building Code - to build period versus g load spectra. Two types of force response spectra (dynamic load factor versus frequency) are also built here - the safety relief valve response spectrum found in B31.1 and a general force response spectrum derived from the user’s own time history.

Clicking the icon in the dynamic analysis input processor opens the Spectrum Wizard. This icon is identified in the following illustration:

The following window appears:

Each of the five spectra may be selected using the radio buttons on the left side of the win-dow. A default spectrum name is provided but any valid file name, without blanks, may be entered in its place. Once the input parameters are entered, the spectrum is built for the analysis by clicking on the Generate Spectrum button. To exit this processor, click Done.

After clicking Generate Spectrum, the processor will display the spectrum data and await a user response - Save to File, OK or Cancel. A completed shock spectrum is shown below:


DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Save to File

Save to File does just that, it saves the spectrum as a file with the same spectrum name in the current folder. Two files will be saved for the seismic spectra, one horizontal and one vertical (distinguished by the suffix H or V at the end of the name). Be sure to specify a unique spectrum name, as this processor will overwrite any existing files of the same name. It is not necessary to save the spectrum data to a file to use the data in the current job. The OK button will do that. Use the Save to File button only if you wish to reuse the data in other CAESAR II dynamic analyses.

OK

By clicking OK, the processor will load the appropriate data in the Spectrum Definitions tab in the Dynamic Input and move the data to the dynamic input. Once this processor is closed, the dynamic input will be updated; the spectrum definitions will be listed and gen-erated spectra can be reviewed by clicking the Enter/Edit Spectra Data button at the top of the dynamic analysis input window.

Cancel

Clicking Cancel on this display will quit the display without loading the data into the dynamic input.

The specifics for each spectrum generator are discussed below.

UBC

Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the 1997 Uniform Building Code.



Spectrum Name

This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that will be generated here. A suffix of H and V will be added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respec-tively. Once properly entered, these names will be listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. These names would also be used as data file names if so requested. Do not include a space in the spectrum name.

The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in UBC Figure 16-3 (below). Ts=Cv/2.5Ca & T0=Ts/5

The vertical spectrum will be set to 50% of I·Ca across the entire period range.

Importance Factor

This is the Seismic Importance Factor, I, as defined in Table 16-K. The calculated spec-trum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of the structure.

Seismic Coefficient Ca

Based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, this is the "Zero Period Acceleration" for the site as defined in Table 16-Q. Table values range from 0.06 to 0.66.



Seismic Coefficient Cv

Based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, this parameter sets the ground accelera-tion at higher periods (lower frequencies) for the site as defined in Table 16-R. Table val-ues range from 0.06 to 1.92.

ASCE7

Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the ASCE 7-02 Standard.

Spectrum Name


The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in ASCE 7-02 Figure 9.4.1.2.6 (below). Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5. Above a period of 4 seconds, the hor-izontal spectrum acceleration changes to .

The vertical spectrum will be set to 20% of SDS across the entire period range. Neither I nor R affects the vertical spectrum.



Importance Factor

This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, I, as defined in Table 9.1.4. The calculated hor-izontal spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spec-tra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5 based on the function of the structure

Site Coefficient Fa

Listed in Table 9.4.1.2.4a, Fa is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum considered earthquake acceleration (SS). Table values range from 0.8 to 2.5. This value is used with the mapped short period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.

Site Coefficient Fv

Listed in Table 9.4.1.2.4b, Fv is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped 1-second period maximum considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Table values range from 0.8 to 3.5. This value is used with the mapped 1-second period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.

Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at the system location for a structure having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of its exceedance over 50 years is 2%. Short period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 9.4.1.2.

Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at the system location for a structure having a period of 1 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of its exceedance over 50 years is 2%. One-second period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 9.4.1.2.

Response Modification R

This is the Response Modification Coefficient, R, as defined in Table 9.5.2.2. The calcu-lated horizontal spectrum accelerations will be divided by this value to generate the shock spectra in accordance with Equation 9.5.6.5-3. This term reflects system ductility. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures and 3.5 for piping is not atypical.

IBC

Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the International Building Code 2000



Spectrum Name


The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in IBC 2000 Fig. 1615.1.4 (below). Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5

The vertical spectrum will be set to 20% of SDS (implied in 1617.1.2) across the entire period range.

Importance Factor

This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in Table 1604.5. The calculated spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5 based on the function of the structure.

Site Coefficient Fa

Listed in Table 16.15.1.2(1), Fa is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum considered earthquake acceleration (SS). Table values range from 0.8 to



2.5. This value is used with the mapped short period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.

Site Coefficient Fv

Listed in Table 1615.1.2(2), Fv is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped 1-sec-ond period maximum considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Table values range from 0.8 to 3.5. This value is used with the mapped 1-second period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.

Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at the system location for a structure having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of its exceedance over 50 years is 2%. Short period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 1615.1.

Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at the system location for a structure having a period of 1 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of its exceedance over 50 years is 2%. One-second period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 1615.1.

Response Modification R

This is the Response Modification Coefficient, R, as defined in Table 9.5.2.2. The calcu-lated horizontal spectrum accelerations will be divided by this value to generate the shock spectra in accordance with Equation 9.5.6.5-3. This term reflects system ductility. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures and 3.5 for piping is not atypical.

B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum

Selecting this option creates a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor) spec-trum for loads from a safety valve discharge into an open system in accordance with the nonmandatory rules of B31.1 Appendix II - Rules for the Design of Safety Valve Installa-tions.



Spectrum Name

This is the name for the force response spectrum that will be generated here. Once prop-erly entered, this name will be listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. This name would also be used as the data file name if so requested. Do not include a space in the spectrum name.

The spectrum is based on the curve shown in B31.1 Appendix II, refer to Fig. II-3-2 (below).

Opening Time (milliseconds)

Enter the opening time of the relief valve.

User Defined Time History Waveform

Selecting this option creates a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor) spec-trum based on a user-entered load vs. time history.

Spectrum Name

This is the name given to the Force Response Spectrum created from the time history load defined here. Once properly entered, this name will be listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used with Force Sets to build Spectrum Load Cases. This name would also be used as the data file name if so requested. Do not include a space in the spectrum name.



Max. Table Frequency

Enter the maximum frequency desired for the force response spectrum about to be gener-ated. This upper limit should be beyond the peak of the dynamic load factors calculated here. Ideally, the maximum table frequency will show a constant dynamic load factor of 1.0

Number of Points

Enter the number of frequency/dynamic load factor pairs to be generated for your data. A value of twenty is typical.

Enter Pulse Data

Clicking this button will bring up a table in which the time history of the event is defined. In the following example a "trapezoid" event is defined - at time 0 there is no load, this load ramps up to full load of 1.0 (the load is normalized here) in 80 milliseconds; the load remains constant for the next 920 msec (at the time 1000 msec) and then ramps down to zero over 250 msec.

Generate Spectrum

Clicking this button will convert the time history into its equivalent force response spec-trum in terms of Dynamic Load Factor versus frequency (below). The buttons on this window perform the same tasks as those defined at the start of this section.





Response spectrum table values can be entered directly or built and stored as a file for use by CAESAR II such as those generated through the DLF Spectrum Generator. Data stored in a file can be referenced by any job run on the machine.

The Spectrum Wizard also serves this purpose -providing the spectrum definitions and data points. There are two parts to the shock definition - 1) the statement of the name and type of data and 2) the table of actual spectrum data points. If the spectrum data is to be read from a file, the second part of the shock definition is not necessary, instead, the sym-bol # should precede the spectrum name to indicate that the data comes from a file on the hard disk. The name of the hard disk file is the name of the shock spectrum without the symbol and without an extension; it must be located in the same directory as the piping job.

Note The Spectrum Wizard automates common shock definitions, for more information refer to the DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard later in this chapter.

When using a file created by the DLF Spectrum Generator, the user must tell CAESAR II the type of data which resides in the file. (The actual file only contains a table of data points.) This will always be Frequency vs. Force-Multiplier data, with linear interpolation) so a typical definition might look like

#TESTFILE FREQ FORCE LIN LIN

This line tells CAESAR II that there is a file containing spectrum table points on the hard disk by the name of TESTFILE, the table is comprised of frequency versus force multi-plier data, and is to be interpolated linearly.



Note The data in this file may alternatively be read in directly from the Spectrum Data Points dialog box. In this case the "#" should be omitted from the spectrum decla-ration.

Force Sets

Force Sets

Force spectrum analyses, such as a relief valve loading, differ from earthquake analyses in that there is no implicit definition of the load distribution. For example, for earthquakes, the loading is uniform over the entire structure and proportional to the pipe’s mass. With relief valves (and other point loadings) the load is not uniformly distributed and is not pro-portional to the mass. A water hammer load, for example, is proportional to the speed of sound and the initial velocity of the fluid. Its point of application is at subsequent elbow-elbow pairs. Force spectrum analyses require more information than the more common earthquake simulations. This information is the load magnitude, direction, and location. Forces are grouped into like-numbered force sets when these forces occur together, or need to be manipulated in the analysis together. Typical force set input might appear as

-3400 Y 35 1-1250 Y 35 2

where the -3400 and the -1250 are clearly the loads, Y is the direction, 35 is the node num-ber, and the 1 and 2 are the respective load cases. This might indicate two different loading levels of one particular load.

For a skewed load, the force spectrum input might appear as shown below:

-2134 Y 104 1-2134 X 104 1



This demonstrates multiple components in a single pulse spectrum set. (In the case above the pulse spectrum set number is 1). These forces obviously belong in the same force set, since different components of a skewed load always occur together.

Spectrum/Load Cases

Spectrum Load Cases

Spectrum Load Cases for force spectrum analyses are set up somewhat differently than Spectrum Load Cases for earthquake analyses. The Spectrum Load Cases for force spectrum runs must link a Force Multiplier spectrum to a force set.

The load case definition consists of one or more lines on which a spectrum, scale factor (usually 1.0), direction, and force set number is given.

TESTFILE 1.0 Y 1

Note The direction specified on this line does not need to be the direction of the load (which is specified in the force set). This direction is used for labeling and desig-nation of “independent” vs. “dependent” loadings.

More complex nuances of force spectrum load cases are discussed in the Technical Refer-ence Manual. The complexity increases as the number of components in the load case goes beyond 1, and as the time history phenomena being modeled deviates from true impulse type loading.


This is discussed under Earthquake.





Control Parameters

Control Parameters

These parameters describe how the analysis is to be conducted. Particular attention should be paid to the modal summation methodology. Details are discussed in the Technical Ref-erence Manual.

Advanced

These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information, see the Technical Ref-erence Manual.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum)

Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum)

Specifying the Load

This method of solving water hammer or slug problems is the force spectrum method as used for relief valve loadings, except the relief load synthesizer is not necessary. The user estimates a Force-Time profile, then turns it into a Force Multiplier spectrum, which is then linked to Force sets in the load cases. Means of estimating the Force-Time profile are shown in the Applications Guide, subsequent steps proceed as described for Relief Loads.

Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation

This is discussed under Relief Loads.


This is done in the same way as described under Relief Loads.

Force Sets

These are set up in the same way as described under Relief Loads.

Spectrum Load Cases

Development of the load cases is identical to that discussed under Relief Loads.


Static/Dynamic combinations are set up as discussed under Earthquake.




Time History CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Time HistoryTime history analysis is used to solve the dynamic equation of motion for the extracted nodes of vibration, the results of which are then summed to find the system results.

Specifying The Load

Loadings are specified in terms of Force-Time profiles and force sets. The Force-Time profile is used to define the load timing, the force set is used to define the load direction and location. Either the profile or the force set can be used to define the magnitude.

Time History Profile Definitions

Profile Definitions

Time history profiles are defined in a way similar to the definition of response spectra -- the profile must be given a name, data definitions (which must be Time vs. Force), and interpolation methods. As for response spectra, the data must also be defined-either directly or by reading in from a file (in which case the file name must be preceded by the “#” symbol). The profile data may either be either be entered with actual forces, or nor-malized to 1.0 (depending on how the force sets are defined).

One force-time profile should be defined for each load which hits the piping system (i.e., each independent point load). The loading case consists of one or more force profiles which may create a staggered loading on the system.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Time History

Force Sets

Force Sets

Force sets are defined as described for Relief Loads. There should be one (or more) force set for each load profile defined.

Note If the force-time profiles were normalized to 1.0, the maximum magnitude of the loads should be entered here. If the profiles were entered using their actual values, the force set values should be entered as 1.0.

Time History Load Cases

Time history load cases consist of the multiple linkages of force-time profiles to force sets, as described to Relief Loads. Only a single load case may be defined for Time History analyses.

Note For Time History analysis, the direction entry is used only for labeling, rather than as an analytic input value.


This is discussed under Earthquake.

Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models

Lumped masses and snubbers are modified as described for Modal Analysis.


Time History CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Control Parameters

Control Parameters

These parameters define how the analyses is to be conducted. Details are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.

Advanced

These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information see the Technical Ref-erence Manual.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Error Handling and Analyzing the Job

Error Handling and Analyzing the JobExecuting the Check Input command from the menu or toolbar reviews the entries on each page and notifies the user of any errors which must be fixed.

Executing the Run Analysis command from the menu or toolbar performs the error check, and then if no errors are found, performs the analysis. In this case, the next stop is normally the output review.

Performing the Analysis

Each of the four dynamic analysis methods - Modes, harmonic, spectrum, and Time History - have their own procedure for producing results. All of these analyses, however, start in the same manner. Once the dynamic input is saved and checked, CAESAR II fol-lows an execution path similar to that found in statics. The account number is requested if accounting is activated, the ESL is accessed (limited run ESLs are decremented), the ele-ment and system stiffness matrices are assembled, and load vectors are created where appropriate. For dynamics, the system mass matrix is also generated. From this point the processing progresses according to the type of analysis selected. Each of the four types of dynamic analyses are discussed below.

Modes

Once dynamic initialization and the basic equation assembly is completed, CAESAR II enters the eigensolver. The eigensolver calculates the natural frequencies and modes of vibration. Each natural frequency appears on the screen as it is calculated. The elapsed time of the analysis is also listed with the frequency. The processor essentially searches for the natural frequencies, starting with the lowest, and continues until the frequency cutoff is exceeded or the mode count reaches its limit. Both the frequency cutoff and mode cutoff are dynamic analysis control parameters. The frequencies appear to pop out in a random fashion, perhaps three in rapid succession and then one more several seconds later. The amount of time to calculate (or find) these frequencies is a function of the system size, the grouping of the frequencies and the cutoff settings. Eigensolution may be cancelled at any time, with the analysis continuing using the mode shapes selected up to that point. After the last frequency is calculated, CAESAR II uses the Sturm Sequence Check to confirm that no modes were skipped. If the check fails, the user may either return to the dynamic input or continue with the spectral analysis. (Sturm Sequence Check failures are usually satisfied if the frequency cutoff is set to a value greater than the last frequency calculated.)

Check Input

Run Analysis


Error Handling and Analyzing the Job CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Eigensolver

After calculation, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. Natural frequencies and mode shapes can be reviewed in text format, or the node shapes can be displayed in and animated fashion.

Harmonic

For each forcing frequency listed in the dynamic input, CAESAR II performs a separate analysis. These analyses are similar to static analyses and take the same amount of time to complete. At the completion of each solution the forcing frequency, its largest calculated deflection, and the phase angle associated with it are listed on the screen. The root results for each frequency, and the system deflections, are saved for further processing. Only twenty frequencies may be carried beyond this point and into the output processor. When all frequencies are analyzed, CAESAR II presents the frequencies on the screen and allows the user to select those needed (in terms of frequency and phase angle) for further analysis. This choice can be made after checking deflections at pertinent nodes for those frequencies.

Selection of Phase Angles

Phased solutions are generated when damping is considered or when the user enters phase angles in the dynamic input.

For all “phased” harmonic analyses, the user is given a choice of selecting from 18 sepa-rate phase angle solutions, (including the cycle maxima and minima) for each excitation frequency. Each separate phase angle solution represents a point in time during one com-plete cycle of the system’s response. The primary difference between a solution with and without phase angles is when phase angles are entered, there is no way of knowing before-


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Error Handling and Analyzing the Job

hand just when the maximum stresses, forces, and displacements are going to occur during the cycle. For this reason, the displacements and stresses are often checked for a number of points during the cycle for each excitation frequency. The user must select these points interactively when the harmonic solution ends. There will be a complete displacement, force, moment, and stress solution for each frequency/phase selected for output. Since there are only 99 cases possible for any one harmonic output processing session, the user with many excitation frequencies must use the interactive selection process judiciously. In most cases the largest displacement solution will represent the largest stress solution, but this is not always guaranteed. The user is also presented with the option of letting CAESAR II select the frequency/phase pairs offering the largest displacements on a sys-tem basis. The displaced shapes for the remaining frequencies are then processed just like static cases with local force, moment, and stress calculations. Control then shifts to an out-put processor identical to the static output processor. The output processor also provides the user an animated display of the harmonic results. Users should remember that all har-monic results are amplitudes. For example, if a harmonic stress is reported as 15200 psi, then the stress due to the dynamic load, which will be superimposed onto any steady state component of the stress, can be expected to vary between +15200 psi and -15200 psi. The total stress range due to this particular dynamic loading would be 30400 psi.

Spectrum

The spectrum analysis procedure can be broken down into three tasks - 1) calculate the system’s natural frequencies, mode shapes, and mass participation factors; 2) using the system frequencies, pull the corresponding response amplitudes from the spectrum table and calculate the system response for each mode of vibration; 3) combine the modal responses and directional components of the shock.

The first part of the analysis proceeds exactly as with the modal analysis.

After the natural frequencies are calculated, system displacements, forces, moments, and stresses are calculated on the modal level and combined. Once all the results are collected, the dynamic analysis output screen appears. The spectral results may be examined here, and the user may also review the natural frequencies and animated mode shapes.

Time History

The modal time history analysis follows steps similar to a spectrum analysis. The modes of vibration of the system are computed, the dynamic equation of motion is solved through numeric integration techniques for each mode at a number of successive time steps, with the modal results being summed, yielding system responses at each time step.

The output processor displays one load case (and optionally, one load combination) with the maximum loads developed throughout the load application. There also are as many “snap-shot” cases as requested by the user.


Error Handling and Analyzing the Job CAESAR II - User’s Guide


�� 3,�"��$) )��

�� &9��%�'�� 1� � ��+��"�#$$�� +!

�� )��0��)��"��$) )�� '�� *

Entry into the Processor CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Entry into the ProcessorThe dynamic output processor is accessed directly following completion of the dynamic analysis, or it may be accessed anytime subsequently from the Main Menu Output options.

Dynamic Analysis Output

There are four types of dynamic output results to process:

• Harmonic results

• Frequency/Modal results from a Mode-Only solution (this solution also exists if a spectrum solution was run).

• Spectrum results, from earthquake, waterhammer, and relief valve solutions

• Time History results

Harmonic results are reviewed using the static output processor, which is discussed in Chapter 7 (special notes on reviewing harmonic results are presented later in this chapter). The other three solution types share the same dynamic output processor. After entering this processor, a screen similar to that of the static output processor appears:

9-2 Dynamic Output Processing

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Entry into the Processor

Dynamic Processor

The left-hand column shows the load cases that were analyzed. The top center column shows the reports available for those load cases. The right-hand column shows General Results, or reports that are not associated with load cases.

For Spectrum analyses, the load cases listed constitute all of the Spectrum load cases as well as all of the static/dynamic combinations. For Time History analysis, the listed loads are the “results maxima” case and each of the “snap-shot” cases for the single Time His-tory load case and each of the static/dynamic combinations.

The user can select the reports and the loadcases to be viewed by highlighting one or more load cases (if necessary) and simultaneously one or more reports (reports in the right-hand column do not require that a report be highlighted). (Selection is done by clicking, ctrl-clicking, and shift-clicking with the mouse.) These reports can then be printed, printed to file, saved to file or displayed.

Dynamic Output Processing 9-3

Entry into the Processor CAESAR II - User’s Guide

A number of commands are available from this screen:

File-Open—Opens a different job for output review. The user is prompted for the desired file; Modal/Spectrum results are stored in *._s files, while Time History results are stored in *._t files.

Print—Prints the selected reports.

Save—Writes the selected reports to file, in ASCII format.

Animate—Allows the user to view animated motion. Modem and spectrum results allow animation of the mode shapes, while time history analysis pro-vides an animated simulation of the system response to the force-time profile.

Input—Returns to the piping input processor.

Title—Allows the user to enter report titles for this group of reports.

View Reports—Displays the selected reports on the terminal. Each report selected is presented, one at a time, for inspection. Users may scroll through the reports where necessary. Specific node numbers or results can be located and highlighted with the FIND (ctrl-F) command. To move to the next report the user should click the right-arrow button.

Microsoft Word Output —For those users with access to Microsoft

Word, CAESAR II provides the ability to send output reports directly to Word. This permits the use of all of Word’s formatting features (font selec-tion, margin control, etc.) and printer support from the CAESAR II program.

This feature is activated through use of the button when producing a report. Users can append multiple reports to form a final report, by selecting

the desired reports, clicking the button, closing Word, selecting the next

report to be added, clicking the button again, etc. A table of contents, is displayed reflecting the cumulatively produced reports.

File-Open

File-Print

File-Save

Animate

Input

Title

View Reports

Microsoft Word

�


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Report Types

Report TypesThere are two types of reports available from the dynamic output processor. There are those associated with specific load cases (the Report Options shown in the center col-umn) and those not associated with specific load cases (the General Results in the right column).

Note For Modal analysis, there are no load cases, so the center column is blank

Reports associated with load cases are those associated with the spectral or time history displacement solution. The Report Options are displacements, reactions, forces, moments and stresses.

Displacements

This report gives the magnitude of the displacement for each load case. For spectral results, due to summing methodology, all displacement values in this report are positive. For time history analysis, the values are correctly signed.

The displacement report gives the maximum displacement that is anticipated due to the application of the dynamic shock. For spectral analysis, note that all of the displacement values are positive. The direction of the displacement is indeterminate, i.e. there will be a tendency for the system to oscillate due to the potential energy stored after undergoing some maximum dynamic movement. The displacements printed are relative to the move-ment of the earth.

Restraints

This report gives the magnitude of the reactions for each load case. A typical entry is shown as follows:

NODE FX

5 716

649

2X(1)

The first line for each node contains the maximum load that occurred at some time during the dynamic event. The second line for each node contains the maximum modal contribu-tion to the load, and the third line for each node tells which mode and loading was respon-sible for the maximum. This form of the report permits easy identification of the culprit modes.

The mode identification line is broken down as follows:

2 X (1)

mode load direction (load component)


Report Types CAESAR II - User’s Guide

For example, at node 5 the resultant dynamic load due to the shock was 716. The largest modal component (of the 716) was 649, due to mode 2, and produced by the first X direc-tion component (either the first support motion set for displacement response spectrum analysis or the first force set for force response spectrum analysis). This form of dynamic output report allows us to know if there is a problem, and if there is, then which mode of vibration and load component is the major contributor to the problem.

If the component shows up as a (P), then it was the pseudostatic (seismic anchor move-ment) contribution of the loading that resulted in the major component of the response. If the component shows up as an (M), this indicates that it was the missing mass contribu-tion. A typical restraint report follows:

CAESAR II SUPPORT REACTIONS FILE: T133-A(OCC) Shock Case #1 DATE: MAY 22,1989

NODE ———Forces(lb.)———— ———Moments(ft.lb.)————TOTALS FX FY FZ MX MY MZMODAL MAX FX/Mode FY/Mode FZ/Mode MX/Mode MY/Mode MZ/Mode

5 716 617 477 4099 10682 10238 Rigid Anchor

649 546 324 2614 7500 8896

2 X(1) 1 Y(1) 2 X(1) 3 Y(1) 2 X(1) 1 Y(1)

70 315 813 749 8868 13343 11436 Rigid Anchor

207 652 648 8675 11597 9805

1 Y(1) 1 Y(1) 2 X(1) 1 Y(1) 2 X(1) 1 Y(1)

Local Forces

This report gives elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate sys-tem. The a-b-c coordinate system is defined as follows:

For straight pipe not connected to an intersection:

“a” is along the element axis (i.e. perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)

“b” is axY, unless a is vertical and then b is along X

“c” is axb.

For bends and elbows, and for each segment end:


“b” is normal to the plane of the bend

“c” is axb

For intersections, and for each segment framing into the intersection:


“b” is normal to the plane of the intersection

“c” is axb



Note x indicates the vector cross product.

Force, moment, and stress reports are similar to restraint reports in that each has the maxi-mum response, followed by the modal maximum, followed by the modal maximum load identifier. All force/moment reports are setup to represent the forces and moments that act on the end of the element to keep the element in equilibrium.

Global Forces

This report contains information identical to that given above for local forces except that it is oriented along the global X, Y, and Z axes. A typical report follows:

CAESAR II GLOBAL FORCE REPORT FILE: T133-A(OCC) Shock Case #1 DATE: MAY 22, 1989

NODE —————Forces(lb.)———— ————Moments(ft.lb.)————TOTALS FX FY FZ MX MY MZMODE MAX FX/Mode FY/Mode FZ/Mode MX/Mode MY/Mode MZ/Mode

5 716 617 477 4099 10682 10238

649 546 324 2614 7500 8896

2 X(1) 1 Y(1) 2 X(1) 3 Y(1) 2 X(1) 1 Y(1)

10 716 617 477 4099 6771 6442

649 546 324 2614 4799 4343

2 X(1) 1 Y(1) 2 X(1) 3 Y(1) 2 X(1) 1 Y(1)

Stresses

The stress report contains axial, bending, maximum octahedral, and code stresses as well as in-plane and out-of-plane stress intensification factors. These reports contain mode, and modal maximum data as well. A typical report follows:



CAESAR II STRESS REPORT FILE: T133-A(OCC)Shock Case #1 DATE: MAY 22, 1989

NODES ————————Stress(lb./sq.in.)————————(lb./sq.in.)—

TOTALS AXIAL BENDING TORSION MAX OCT STRESS ALLOW

MODE MAX AX/Mode BND/Mode TOR/Mode OCT/Mode SIF1 SIF0 STRESS/Mode

5 60 5937 822 2897 1.00 1.00 6161 0

54 4449 524 2139 4561

2 X(1) 1 Y(1) 3 Y(1) 1 Y(1) 1 Y(1)

10 60 3750 822 1913 1.00 1.00 4095 0

54 2587 524 1273 2667

2 X(1) 2 X(1) 3 Y(1) 2 X(1) 2 X(1)

Forces/Stresses

This report is intended to be a brief summary of the forces and code stresses for a particu-lar load case. This report contains maximum responses only, the calculated stress, and its allowable.

CAESAR II FORCE/STRESS REPORT FILE: T133-A(OCC) Shock Case #1 DATE: MAY 22, 1989

——Forces(lb.)—— —Moments(ft.lb.)— (lb./sq.in.)

NODE FX FY FZ MX MY MZ SIF1 SIF0 STRESS ALLOW

5 716 617 477 4099 10682 10238 1.00 1.00 6161 0

10 716 617 477 4099 6771 6442 1.00 1.00 4095 0

Cumulative Usage

This report is available only when there are one or more Fatigue Stress types present. Only one report is generated, regardless of the number of Fatigue load cases selected. The report shows, on an element-by-element basis, the impact of each load case on the total Fatigue allowable, as well as the cumulative impact of all simultaneously selected load cases. If the total Usage Factor exceeds 1.0, this implies Fatigue failure under that loading condi-tion.



The General Results reports comprise the following and are independent of the load cases selected. They are as follows:

Mass Participation Factors

This report gives one number for each mode and load direction for each dynamic load case. This value provides the user with a “feel” for the effect the dynamic loading and the mass had on the particular mode. Neither the absolute magnitude nor its sign has any sig-nificance, only the relationship between values for a single load case is important.



CAESAR II MASS PARTICIPATION FILE:T133-A EXAMPLE DYNAMIC OUTPUTDATE: MAY 22, 1989

SHOCKPARTICIPATION SCALE ———Cosines———

MODE FREQ FACTOR FACTOR CX CY CZ DESCRIPTION

DYNAMIC SHOCK LOAD CASE 1

1 1.7 56631 1.00 1.0 .0 .0 ELCENTRO

1 1.7 -4.71611 1.00 .0 1.0 .0 ELCENTRO

2 2.1 -2.67370 1.00 1.0 .0 .0 ELCENTRO

2 2.1 1.20175 1.00 .0 1.0 .0 ELCENTRO

3 3.1 23674 1.00 1.0 .0 .0 ELCENTRO

3 3.1 88717 1.00 .0 1.0 .0 ELCENTRO

Natural Frequencies

Calculated modal natural frequencies are reported in Hertz and radians per second; period is reported in seconds.

CAESAR II NATURAL FREQUENCIES FILE: T133-ADATE: MAY 22, 1989

(Hz) (Radians/Sec) (Sec)

MODE FREQUENCY FREQUENCY PERIOD

1 1.652 10.379 .605

2 2.083 13.090 .480

3 3.054 19.186 .327

Modes Mass Normalized

A mass normalization procedure is used to compute valued magnitudes for mode shapes. A number of programs use this normalization procedure, and this report was generated to make it easier for CAESAR II users to compare their results to other programs’ results.

Modes Unity Normalized

This report scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to 1.0, with all other dis-placements and rotations scaled accordingly. This mode report is the easiest way to get a “feel” for the shape of the mode.

The example shows two mode shapes from a small job. Users should note that in the first mode the largest single component is in the Y direction (which we would expect from the earlier participation factor report), and in the second mode the largest single component is in the Z direction.

Note Unity normalized means that the largest displacement component in the mode is set to 1.0 and all other displacement values are scaled accordingly.



CAESAR II MODE SHAPES FILE: T133-A

UNITY NORMALIZED DATE: MAY 22, 1989

————Translations———— ————Rotations————

NODE DX DY DZ RX RY RZ

MODE 1 Frequency (Hz) = 1.652

5 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000

10 .0000 -.0562 .0436 .0005 -.0008 -.0010

15 .1340 -.0563 .1051 .0007 -.0016 -.0017

20 -.0521 -.1124 .1052 .0003 -.0021 -.0026

25 -.0521 -.4037 .3368 -.0005 -.0024 -.0031

30 -.0521 -.7062 .5845 -.0014 -.0025 -.0029

35 -.0521 -.9655 .8820 -.0023 -.0023 -.0022

40 .1290 -.9655 .5606 -.0029 -.0019 -.0014

45 .2314 -.9655 .2369 -.0035 -.0016 -.0007

50 .2313 -1.0000 .3842 -.0041 -.0014 -.0001

55 .2175 -.9999 -.0500 -.0045 -.0013 .0003

60 .0001 -.1608 -.0500 -.0034 -.0007 .0011

65 .0000 -.0541 -.0082 -.0017 -.0002 .0009

70 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000

MODE 2 Frequency (Hz) = 2.083

5 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000

10 -.0002 .0517 .0857 .0005 -.0016 .0011

15 -.1389 .0517 .1497 .0006 -.0032 .0015

20 -.4981 .0045 .1498 .0003 -.0038 .0011

25 -.4983 .1026 .5105 -.0002 -.0034 .0009

30 -.4984 .1878 .8064 -.0007 -.0025 .0008

35 -.4985 .2793 1.0000 -.0013 -.0014 .0010

40 -.6057 .2793 .8575 -.0015 .0002 .0010

45 -.6796 .2792 .7022 -.0015 .0017 .0004

50 -.6797 .2865 .4858 -.0010 .0025 -.0002

55 -.6495 .2864 .4158 -.0002 .0030 -.0004

60 -.0001 .1785 .4155 .0008 .0032 -.0012

65 .0000 .0598 .1274 .0004 .0023 -.0010

70 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000

Included Mass Data

This report displays the percent of the total system mass/force included in the extracted modes, and the percent of system mass/force included in the missing mass correction (if any) for each of the individual shocks of each of the dynamic load cases. This value gives an indication of the accuracy of the total system response captured by the dynamic model, with 100% being the difficult to achieve ideal.

The first 3 items displayed by the report are the Load Case, the Shock Description, and the direction cosines. The next item, the % Mass Included, shows the percentage of mass active in each of the X, Y, and Z directions. Following the



% Mass Included is the % Force Active. This value is computed by taking the algebraic sum in each of the global directions, and then applying the SRSS method to each of the three directions. (The sums of the three directions are added vectorally.) The final column displays the % Force Added. This value is obtained by taking the % Force Active and subtracting from 100.

Input Listing

This report, which may be displayed or printed, lists the input for the piping model or for the dynamic input.

Mass Model

The Mass Model shows how CAESAR II lumped masses for the dynamic runs. The mass lumping report should show a fairly uniform distribution of masses. Large or irregular variations in the values shown should be investigated. Usually these large values can be reduced by breaking down exceedingly long, straight runs of pipe.

The mass lumping report shown below is very uniform in distribution and should produce a good dynamic solution. Note that rotational terms are ignored by CAESAR II.

CAESAR II MASS MODEL FILE: T133-A

EXAMPLE DYNAMIC OUTPUT DATE: MAY 22,1989———Translational (lbm)——— ————Rotational————

NODE DX DY DZ RX RY RZ5 172.6228 172.6228 172.6228 .0000 .0000 .000010 345.2455 345.2455 345.2455 .0000 .0000 .000015 345.2455 345.2455 345.2455 .0000 .0000 .000020 345.2455 345.2455 345.2455 .0000 .0000 .000025 345.2455 345.2455 345.2455 .0000 .0000 .000030 345.2455 345.2455 345.2455 .0000 .0000 .000035 345.2455 345.2455 345.2455 .0000 .0000 .000040 345.2455 345.2455 345.2455 .0000 .0000 .000045 345.2455 345.2455 345.2455 .0000 .0000 .000050 345.2455 345.2455 345.2455 .0000 .0000 .000055 517.8690 517.8690 517.8690 .0000 .0000 .000060 517.8690 517.8690 517.8690 .0000 .0000 .000065 345.2455 345.2455 345.2455 .0000 .0000 .000070 172.6228 172.6228 172.6228 .0000 .0000 .0000

Boundary Conditions

The Active Boundary Condition Report shows the user how CAESAR II dealt with the nonlinear restraints in the job. It shows which directional supports were included, which gaps were assumed closed, and just how friction resistance was modeled.


C

D

AESAR II - User’s Guide Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File

CAESAR II DYNAMIC BOUNDARY FILE: T133-A EXAMPLE DYNAMIC OUTPUT CONDITION REPORT DATE: MAY 22, 1989

————Cosines———— (lb./in.)

NODE X Y Z STIFFNESS DESCRIPTION

5 1.000 1.000 1.000 .100000E+13 Rigid Anchor

70 1.000 1.000 1.000 .100000E+13 Rigid Anchor

Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. To print a hard copy of the reports, click the File-Print button.

To send reports to a file rather than the printer, the user should click the File-Save button. After initial selection, the user is presented with a file dialog to select the name of the file. To change the file name for a new report, the user should select File-Save As.

To send reports to Microsoft Word, click the button. The reports display

in Microsoft Word where you can access Microsoft Word’s feature set.

All reports that are to be saved in the output file need not be declared at one time. Subsequent reports sent to the file during the session are appended to the file started in the session. (These output files are only closed when a new out-put device, file or printer is defined.) After closing the report, a table of con-tents is added.

File-Print

File-Save

Microsoft Word

ynamic Output Processing 9-13

3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor CAESAR II - User’s Guide

3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation ProcessorThe Animation module allows users to view animated motion of the system for static dis-placements or various dynamic movements. The mode and spectrum results, for example, allow animation of the mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated simulation of the system response to the force-time profile.

The animation options can be accessed from the CAESAR II Main Menu, by going to the Output/Animation and selecting the appropriate animation type from the sub-menu choices. In addition, the animation processor can also be activated from each of the indi-vidual Static/Dynamic Output Processors by clicking the View Animation button.

Animation of any type has identical set of buttons and menu choices (similar to ones described in the Piping Input Graphics Processor) that will be described herein. Any rele-vant differences will be described below for each corresponding animation type.

Launching the Animation Processor causes the following dialog to display.

The piping model is shown in its default state (volume mode, isometric view, orthographic projection). For the convenience of the user, it can be displayed in any of the defined orthographic views Front/Back, Top/Bottom, Left/Right, or Isometric by clicking the cor-responding buttons. Similar to the Input Processor Graphics, the model can be interac-tively rotated, zoomed, or panned. Zoom to Window and Zoom to Selection options are also available.

Perspective or orthographic projections can also be set. Node numbers can be displayed by clicking the Nodes button. The desired load case or mode shape can be selected from


CAESAR II - User’s Guide 3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor

the corresponding drop down list. The frequency of the load case associated with the ani-mation is shown at the top of the view plot whenever the Titles option (available from the Action menu) is activated.

The animated plot menu displays several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the commands to activate the animation. Motion uses the centerline representation while Volume Motion produces the volume graphics image. Each of the motion options causes the graphics processor to animate the current plot. If the Node Numbers button is clicked, the node number text is moved together with the corresponding node. Once the plot is “moving” on the screen, it may be sped up, slowed down, or stopped using appropriate toolbar button. After selecting a different load case or mode shape from the drop down list, the motion automatically stops. One of the motion buttons should be clicked again to activate the model “movement”.

Print Motion option (available from the File menu) prints all of the vibration positions of the current mode. It is not available for the Time History animation. For clarity purposes, it is recommended to use the single line (Motion) option to generate the printouts. The Volume Motion option generates a printout which is often too cluttered to be useful.

Save Animation to File

The animated graphics can be saved to a file by clicking the Create an Animation File button. Alternatively, this option can be accessed from the dynamic plot menu File/Save Animation. After activating this option, the standard Windows Save As Dialog will dis-play prompting the user to enter the file name and directory to save the files. By default the current file name and current data directory will be used. There will be two files cre-ated an *.HTML file and a *.HSF file. To view the saved animation, find the correspond-ing *.HTML file and double click on it within Windows Explorer. The corresponding *.HSF file containing the animation routines will be displayed. The *.HTML file contains useful buttons to play or pause the animation. The model can also be viewed at different orthogonal planes, or returned to the isometric view.

Note The *.HTML is an interactive file.

The first time a CAESAR II created .HTML file is opened with Internet Explorer or other internet browser, the user will receive a message requesting permission to download a control from TechSoftAmerica. The user should answer “Yes” to allow the download, after which the image will display. Once the model appears, right-clicking the model will show the available viewing options, such as orbit, pan, zoom, and/or different render modes. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard as necessary.

Note Internet Explorer 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly. Since Inter-net Explorer 5.0 is no longer supported by Microsoft, COADE recommends Inter-net Explorer 6.0 or later.

Animation of Static Results - Displacements

CAESAR II allows the user to view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position for the basic load cases. To animate the static results, execute the Options/View Animation



menu choice from the Static Output Menu. Alternatively, clicking the View Animation but-ton allows the user to view graphic animation of the displacement solution.

Static animation graphics has all the model projection and motion toolbar options described earlier. The load case can be selected from the drop down list. The title consists of the load case name followed by the file name and can be toggled on and off from the Action menu.

The Static Animation processor allows viewing of the single line and volume motion, con-trols the speed of the movement, and the animation can be saved to a file as described above.

Note The static animation does not have much physical meaning behind it. This is just a “one-time” move produced from the CAESAR II calculated displacements (from temperature growth, initial SUS system sag and/or any other related loads). It is better to use the Deflected Shape button on the 3D/HOOPS Graphics view of the Static Output Processor toolbar. For more information refer to 3D/HOOPS Graph-ics Tutorial for Static Output Processor, Deflected Shape.

Animation of Dynamic Results – Modal/Spectrum

This option allows the user to view the calculated modes of vibration that correspond to particular natural frequencies of the system. It is available from the Dynamic Output Pro-cessor after running the Modal analysis.

After invoking the Modal animation type, the system is displayed in its default state. The animation screen display the same toolbar options described earlier. Natural frequencies can be selected from the drop down list to animate the corresponding mode shape. The title shows the natural frequency in Hz followed by the current file name and the date.

Animated graphics for a particular mode shape (frequency) can be viewed in a single line or volume mode motion with speed control, and/or saved to an HTML file for later presen-tation as described above.

Animation of Dynamic Results – Harmonic

During the harmonic analysis, CAESAR II calculates the system response to the excitation frequency. This response can be animated.

The Harmonics Animation module can be launched from the Harmonic Output Processor by clicking the View Animation button. The system displays in its default isometric state. The animation screen displays the same toolbar options described earlier that allow single line and volume motion as well as speed up and slow down options. Occasional cases cor-responding to the excitation frequencies may be selected from the drop down list. The title shows the currently selected frequency, file name, and the date. The title may be disabled from the Action menu.

Animated graphics for each load case analyzed can be saved to an HTML file for later pre-sentation.

Animation of Dynamic Results – Time History

The Time History animation module can be launched from the CAESAR II Dynamic Out-put processor by clicking the View Animation button. The system displays in the centerline


CAESAR II - User’s Guide 3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor

isometric mode. The model can be rotated, zoomed, or panned and can be set to different orthographic projections. The current time history time step and the job name are shown in the title on the top of the graphics view.

Note, due to complexity of the time history calculations and to decrease the animation time, the animation is only available in centerline mode.

Note The Save Animation to File option is not available in the time history animation for the same reason.

An additional feature of the Time History animation engine is the Element Viewer. The Element Viewer dialog displays specific element information for a given time step. After clicking the Element Viewer button, the Element Info dialog appears displaying the nodal displacements, forces, moments, code stress, and SIF information provided for the current element at a current time step. Clicking the Next >> or << Previous buttons will change the information to correspond to the next or previous element in the system for the same time step.

There are several ways to animate the model using the Motion button; clicking the Next Step /Previous Step buttons, jumping to the beginning or the end of the time history anima-tion; or using the Time Slider.

Clicking the Motion button will start the animation, the current time step will be displayed in the title line, and the task bar at the bottom of the animation graphics view will show the progress. The animation speed can be increased, decreased, or stopped by clicking the appropriate toolbar buttons.

Clicking the Next Time Step or Previous Time Step button while the Element Info dialog is active will update the dialog information for the current element for the next or previous time step. If the animation is stopped, this will advance or back space the animation one step.

Clicking the View Animation button again after stopping the animation will continue the time history motion from the location (the time step) where the animation was stopped.

Clicking the Plot the First Time Step or Plot the Last Time Step button will bring the anima-tion to the beginning or the end correspondingly.

Dragging the Time Slider to the appropriate time step. The bar’s position adjusts automat-ically as the animation progresses or users can click on the slider with the left mouse but-ton and drag it along the time-line to find the desired time step or to see the model’s displaced shape. If the Element Info dialog is active, the highlighted element information is updated to correspond to the current time step.



Time History Animation View with Element Viewer Dialog

The node numbers can be enabled by clicking the corresponding button, however, it is recommended to have node numbering disabled during operation of the animation proces-sor. As the animated elements move, the node numbers are redrawn for every position in the system thereby creating a blinking effect making it hard to follow the animation.


�� +4,%�)�)�� %�� 8��

��$'��'��0��%�)�)�� %��((�� "�#$$�� 3%�� ( ) �� ++%�)�)�� %�� <�� B+�� ++%�)�)�� %�� <�� B�� +&%�)�)�� %�� <�� B�� >

�� )��)�)�� )��<�� *

Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II

Structural Steel Frame

The CAESAR II structural element preprocessor is started from the Main Menu by first opening an existing (or new) structural file, and then using the Input-Structural com-mand. The following screen appears:

10-2 Structural Steel Modeling

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II

Input - Structural Steel

Note Structural file names should be limited to eight characters (with no embedded spaces) since CAESAR II currently is unable to include long file names in piping models. The structural file must also be located in the same directory as the piping model.

Input is interactive/batch keyword. This is a method of input most familiar to the finite element/structural analyst and probably not so familiar to the piping engineer. Those users not already familiar with “keyword type” input should pay particular attention to the examples, and make liberal use of the help functions ([F1]).

The general input format is:

<keyword>, <parameter #1>, <parameter #2>, ..., <parameter #n>

or

<keyword>, <key1=n1>, <key2 = n2>, ..., <key3 = n3>

For example......

Structural Steel Modeling 10-3


FIX 5 ALL Fixes node 5, all degrees of freedom

SECID = 1,W10X49Defines properties for section #1.

EDIM 5 10 DY=12-0Define vertical member from 5 to 10.

Example Input

Since many structures have a considerable degree of “repeatability”, there are various forms, options, and deviations of the above commands to help the user generate large structural models quickly and easily. For the most part however, and albeit with a little more time and effort, the above method of single element generation is well suited to most pipers’ needs.

The most commonly used keywords are shown as follows:

EDIM ............ Define structural element

FIX ................ Define structural anchor (ALL) or restraint

LOAD ........... Define concentrated forces

UNIF ................Define uniform loads

SECID..............Define cross section properties

A full explanation of all keywords is included in the Technical Reference Manual.

Each of the keyword statements is built and or edited using dialog boxes. Existing data lines may be edited by selecting the line; an appropriately-popu-lated dialog box appears. After changing the data, the Edit-Replace menu command replaces the current line; the Edit-Add menu command adds the line to the end of the file. The dialog box may also be dragged-and-dropped to any other location in the file using the mouse. Existing lines may be deleted with the Edit-Delete menu command.

Edit-Replace

Edit-Add

Edit-Delete



New lines may be created by selecting a keyword command from the menu or from the toolbars. After filling in the data fields, the Add toolbar adds the line to the end of file, or the dialog may be dragged-and-dropped to any other location in the file.

All lists are printed with “index numbers” and many of the node and element commands accept index numbers as well as actual node numbers. To specify an index number instead of a node number enclose the value in parentheses, i.e. FIX (1) TO (10) ALL, fixes the first 10 nodes in the node list. (In many cases using an index instead of a node number can greatly facilitate pattern generation).

Certain commands set parameters that remain set for all further element generations. DEFAULT sets the default section and material ID, ANGLE sets the default element ori-entation, and BEAMS, BRACES, and COLUMNS set the default end connection type.

The full AISC data base with over 900 cross-sectional shapes is available on a “per-member-name” basis, additionally the user may define any arbitrary cross sectional shapes. The proper data base (either AISC77.BIN, AISC89.BIN, UK. BIN, AUST90.BIN, SAFRICA.BIN, KOREAN.BIN, or GERM91.BIN) must be selected using the Configuration/Setup module before starting the construction of a structural model. Sections may be selected from a tree structure, grouping sections by type.



Configuration/Setup

AISC names should be keyed in exactly as shown in the AISC handbook with the excep-tion that fractions should be represented as decimals to four decimal places, i.e. the angle L6X3-1/2X1/2 would be entered: L6X3.5000X0.5000.



Member end connection freedom is a concept used quite frequently in struc-tural analysis that has no real parallel in piping work. Several of the example problems contain free end connection specifications and should be studied for details.

1. Structural models may be run alone, or may be included in piping jobs. To run a struc-tural model alone use the following procedure: After selecting a job name, enter the structural input processor using option Input-Structural from the Main Menu.

2.Enter the structural steel model and its loading. Use the Operations-Plot command liberally to check the model.

3.Use File-Save to exit model building, do error checking, and build CAESAR II execution files if there are no errors. After these steps are complete return to the Main Menu.

4. Start CAESAR II up at the analysis level. Select the load cases to be analyzed. Do not use CAESAR II’s recommendations unless a weight-concentrated load case is all that is needed.

5. When the analysis level finishes, enter the standard CAESAR II output processor. Displacements, forces, and moments will be available for each structural element.

6. Run the TOOLS-AISC unity check program to ensure that the most heavily loaded members still satisfy the code.

To include a structural model (or models) in a piping job, use the following procedure:

1. Enter the structural steel input processor as described above.

2. Enter the structural steel model and its loading. Use the interactive plotting liberally to check the model.

3. Use File-Save to exit model building, do error checking, and build CAESAR II exe-cution files if there are no errors.

4.Change the current jobname to the name of the piping model filename and enter the piping spreadsheet input processor. After the piping model has been entered to the user’s satisfaction select the Kaux-Include Struc-tural Files menu option.

5. An include-file dialog box appears. Enter the names of the structural models to be included in this piping run. The next time the user plots, the structure is included in the plot.

Operations-Plot

File-Save





6. After all structural models have been properly included in the piping job, the prepro-cessor can be exited and error checking performed.

7. Once error checking finishes without a fatal message, the entire model is ready to run. After analysis, the structural elements are included in the piping output processor as though they were pipe, except that stresses are not computed.

8. A stand alone AISC code check program is available to verify that forces and moments on standard structural shapes do not exceed the various allowables as defined by the American Institute of Steel Construction.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide 3D HOOPs Graphics

3D HOOPs GraphicsThe 3D/HOOPs Graphics engine in the Structural Steel Modeler is mainly used to verify the model geometry for completeness and accuracy. An Interactive Command Generator allows user friendly entering and updating of the elements data, and the graphics view instantly reflects any changes.

The Structural Steel Modeler 3D Graphics Engine has the same general capabilities as the Piping Input Processor’s Graphics. It has the same HOOPs standard toolbar that allows (along with other options as shown on the image below) zooming, orbiting, and panning, and has options of switching among different orthographic views and volume to single line modes.

The Structural Steel Graphics engine can also show or hide the restraints and anchors, the axis compass, node numbers, and elements lengths. The restraints may also be changed in size relative to the structural elements.

The geometry will be shown on the display screen on the right as soon as there is enough information defined by the user. For example, using Method 2 - Node/Element Specifica-tion Generator, if only NODEs (absolute coordinates of a point in space) are generated, nothing can be shown. However, as soon as an ELEM is defined (to specify a single ele-ment between two points in space), a corresponding graphical element is displayed. When using Method 1 - Element Definition (EDIM: similar to defining elements in the CAESAR II Piping Input Processor), the corresponding graphical element is displayed as soon as the EDIM command is complete. Refer to the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual, Chapter 4: Structural Steel Modeler for more information and comparison between the two methods.


3D HOOPs Graphics CAESAR II - User’s Guide

The Structural Steel Command Generator may be resized and/or turned off to allow for the graphics to take the entire document view. It may also be docked on or off the main frame. Once docked off, it can be moved from the view or closed. To show/hide (open/close) the Structural Steel Commands Generator, go to View menu and select the Input option.

Just as the Piping Input Graphics does, the Structural Steel Graphics has the Change Dis-play option that allows for changing the default colors for steel elements and restraints. See the discussion in the Piping Input 3D Graphics Processor for more information.

Note Loads (such as Uniform Loads or Wind Loads) are not available in plot/graphics mode in the Structural Steel Modeler.

An additional feature of the Structural Steel Modeler is its ability to flip the coordinate system, on the fly. All relevant user entered data is also modified to comply with the newly selected coordinate system, either Y-up or Z-up.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Sample Input

Sample InputThis section contains three structural steel examples. These examples are presented so that the user can enter them into the computer from the listed input. This is without question the best way to become familiar with the structural capability in CAESAR II.

Structural Steel Example #1Determine the stiffness of the structural steel support shown below. Use the estimated “rigid support” piping loads from the piping analysis to back calculate each stiffness.

Structural Steel Example #1

A U-bolt pins the pipe to the top of the channel at node 20. The piping loads output from the pipe stress program are:

• F x = -39.0 lbs.

• F y = -1975.0 lbs.

• F z = 1350.0 lbs.

Select File-New from the CAESAR II Main Menu, click the Structural Input radio but-ton and enter a job name (for example SUPP). Then enter the CAESAR II Structural Steel processor by selecting option Input-Structural from the CAESAR II Main Menu. This brings up the blank data entry screen, ready to define the units.


Structural Steel Example #1 CAESAR II - User’s Guide


At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters that define the model input. Input for the example is as follows:


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Structural Steel Example #1

UNIT ENGLISH.FIL

MATID 1 30E6 .3 11.6E6 36000. 0.283 ;SPECIFY MATERIAL

SECID 1 W16X26 ;DEFINE CROSS SECTIONS

SECID 2 MC8X22.800

SECID 3 L6X4X0.5000

EDIM 5 10 DY=144. SECID=1 ;DEFINE ELEMENTS

EDIM 10 15 DY=72. SECID=1

EDIM 15 20 DZ=70 SECID=2

EDIM 20 25 DZ=20 SECID=2

EDIM 25 10 DZ=-90 DY=-72 SECID=3

FIX 5 ALL ;SPECIFY SUPPORTS

;TRY A PLOT HERE

LOAD 20 FX=-39 FY=-1975 FZ=1350 ;SPECIFY LOADS

Input Structural Steel - Sample

Unit

MATID

SECID

EDIM

FIX

LOAD



At any time during input the user can generate plots of the model by executing the Operations-Plot command. Once the user is satisfied that the model has been entered properly, the model can be checked and saved with the File-Save command. At this time the input is checked, and if no fatal errors are found, the CAESAR II execution files are written, and the model may be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.)

When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. When this is done, the Analysis-Static menu option should be chosen. From this point, structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis. Output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.

The desired results from the analysis of SUPP are the displacements at node 20 of:

• Dx = -9.63 in.

• Dy = -0.44 in.

• Dz = 0.88 in.

These displacements are excessive for a support which is to be assumed rigid in another analysis. The translational stiffness for the support can be computed as follows:

• Kx = 39.0 lb. / 9.63 in. = 4.05 lb./in

• Ky = 1975.0 lb. / 0.44 in. = 4488.64 lb./in.

• Kz = 1350.0 lb. / 0.88 in. = 1534.09 lb./in.

Operations-Plot

File-Save



Structural Steel Example #2A support must be designed to limit the loads on the waste heat boiler’s flue gas nozzle connection. The maximum allowable loads on the nozzle are:

• Fshear = 500 lb. Faxial = 1500 lb.

• Mbending= 5000 ft. lb. Mtorsion = 10000 ft. lb.

Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:




Piping Dimensions



Structure Nodes

Structure Dimensions



Select a job name (for example SUPP2) and enter the structural input processor as described earlier. The structural input screen appears:


At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters (using menu options and/or toolbars) that define the model input, and adds them to the file using the Edit-Add command. Input for the example is as follows:



UNIT ENGLISH.FIL

SECID 1 W24X104 ;DEFINE SECTIONS

SECID 2 W18X50

MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283;DEFINE MATERI-ALS

ANGLE=90 ;COLUMN ORIENTATION

EDIM 230 235 DY=10- ;VERTICAL COLUMNS

EDIM 235 220 DY=13-10

EDIM 200 205 DY=10-

EDIM 205 210 DY=13-10

EDIM 245 250 DX=8.392- DY=10- ;SLOPED COLUMNS

EDIM 260 255 DX=8.392- DY=10-

EDIM 250 220 DX=11.608- DY=13-10

EDIM 255 210 DX=11.608- DY=13-10

DEFAULT SECID=2;MAKE BEAMS DEFAULT SECTION

EDIM 235 240 DZ=-2.5-

EDIM 240 205 DZ=-2.5-

EDIM 220 215 DZ=-2.5-

EDIM 215 210 DZ= -2.5-

EDIM 250 255 DZ=-5-

;THE FINAL SET OF HORIZONTAL BEAMS ALONG THE X AXIS HAVE A STANDARD

;STRONG AXIS ORIENTATION

ANGLE=0.0

EDIM 250 235 DX=11.608-

EDIM 255 205 DX=11.608-

;ANCHOR THE BASE NODES

FIX 245 ALL

FIX 260 ALL

FIX 230 ALL

FIX 200 ALL

At any time during input the user can generate plots of the model by executing Operations-Plot. Once the user is satisfied that the model is correct, exiting with File-Save command checks and saves the model. If no fatal errors are found, then the CAESAR II execution files are written. The model may now be used in a piping analyses or analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed with a piping model.)

Unit

MATID

SECID

EDIM

FIX

LOAD

Operations-Plot

File-Save



When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. The user should change the jobname to the name of the piping input filename (PIPE2 for this example) and enter the input for the piping system to be analyzed.

The input for this job is shown below:

CAESAR II ALL PROPERTIES LISTING (PIPE)

X DIAMETER1 PRESSURE ELASTIC MODPIPE D

FROM DELTA Y WALL THK TEMP 2 1 POISSONS R. INSUL D AUXILIARY DATA

TO Z INS. THK 3 2 CORROSION FLUID D

BEND 5. 6.417ft 30.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894 BEND RADIUS=45.000 FITTING THK.= .3750

10. .000 .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000

.000 .000 .00000 5 .00000 .0000 RSTR NODE= 5.DIR=A CN=0.

STIF=.100000E+13 GAP=.0000 MU=.00

STRT 10. .000 30.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894

15. -8.000ft .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000

.000 .000 .00000 .000000 .0000

RIGD 15. -2.500ft 30.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894 RIGD RIGID WEIGHT=.000

115. .000 .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000

.000 .000 .00000 .000000 .0000 RSTR NODE=115. DIR=X CN=215.

STIF=.100000E+13G AP=.0000 MU=.00

RSTR NODE=115. DIR=Z CN=215.

STIF=.100000E+13G AP=.0000 MU=.00

STRT 15. .000 30.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894

20. -13.833ft .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000

.000 .000 .00000 .000000 .0000

RIGD 20. -2.500ft 30.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 2894 RIGDRIGID WEIGHT=.000

120. .000 .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000

.000 .000 .00000 .000000 .0000 RSTR NODE=120. DIR=X CN=240.

STIF=.100000E+13 GAP=.0000 MU=.00

.000 .000 .00000 .000000 .0000 RSTR NODE=120. DIR=Z CN=240.

STIF=.100000E+13 GAP=.0000 MU=.00

BEND 20. .000 30.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894 BEND RADIUS=45.000 FITTINGTHK.=.3750

25. -8.833ft .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000

.000 .000 .00000 .000000 .0000



STRT 25. 10.000ft 30.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08.2894RSTR NODE=30.DIR=+Y CN=0.

30. .000 .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000 STIF=.100000E+13 GAP=.0000 MU=.00

.000 .000 .00000 .000000 .0000

STRT 30. 30.000ft 30.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894 RSTR NODE=35.DIR=+YCN=0.

35. .000 .375 .00000 .0 .292000 .0000 STIF=.100000E+13 GAP=.0000 MU=.00

.000 .000 .00000 .000000 .0000

BEND 35. 10.000ft 30.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894 BEND RADIUS= 45.00 FITTING THK.= .3750

40. .000 .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000

.000 .000 .00000 .000000 .0000

STRT 40. .000 30.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894

45. .000 .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000

-3.750ft .000 .00000 .000000 .0000

STRT 45. .000 36.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894

50. .000 .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000

-4.000ft .000 .00000 .000000 .0000

STRT 50. .000 36.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894

55. .000 .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000

-20.000ft .000 .00000 .000000 .0000

STRT 55. .000 36.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894

60. .000 .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000

-20.000ft .000 .00000 .000000 .0000

STRT 60. .000 36.000 850.00000 .0 .2740E+08 .2894 RSTR NODE=65. DIR=A CN=0.

65. .000 .375 .00000 .0 .289000 .0000 STIF=.100000E+13 GAP=.0000 MU=.00

-10.000ft .000 .00000 .000000 .0000



To connect the pipe to the structure, follow these procedures:

1. The user must tell CAESAR II the name of the structural steel file to include. From the input Spreadsheet select the Kaux-Include Structural Files menu option. The include File dialog appears.


Enter the name of the structural steel model to be included (SUPP2), by typing or browsing for it.

2. The user should define the connectivity between pipe and structural nodes using restraints with connecting nodes. For the example problem, the node 115 in the pipe model should be tied to node 215 in the structural model in the X and Z directions; similarly, node 120 in the pipe model should be tied to node 240 in the structural model. These connecting nodes may be defined from the piping spreadsheet on any convenient element. Auxiliary field input for these two connections is shown as follows:



Restraint Auxiliary Data

3. If the pipe and structure do not plot properly relative to one-another then either:

a. The connecting nodes were not defined correctly.

b. The CONNECT_GEOMETRY_THRU_CNODES directive was not set to YES in the Configuration/Setup module.

The properly plotted pipe and structure is shown below:



Structural Steel Example #2 Plot

Once the pipe and structure are properly plotted relative to one-another, the piping input processor can be exited and error checking performed. The error checker includes the pipe and structure together during checking. The execution files that are written also include the structural data. In the output the pipe and structure are also plotted together and can only be separated via the plot RANGE command.

The loads on the anchor at 5 are grossly excessive. The structural steel frame and pipe sup-port structure as shown are not satisfactory. Some displaced shape plots from the analysis are shown in the next figure:



Plot Showing Displacement

In this example, displacement of the structure is small relative to the displacement of the pipe. The pipe is thermally expanding out away from the boiler nozzle and down, away from the boiler nozzle.



Plot Showing Displacement

Using the RANGE command the structure is plotted without the pipe. The displaced shape of the of the structure shows that the pipe is pulling the structure in the positive X direction at the top support and pushing the structure in the negative X direction at the bot-tom support. These displacements will only result in higher loads on the boiler nozzle. The vertical location of the structural supports should be studied more closely.

Perhaps vertical springs at 30 and 35 would help, along with a repositioning of the struc-tural supports vertically, i.e. the support at 120 should be moved down so that its line of action in the X direction more closely coincides with the center line of the pipe between 25 and 40.



Structural Steel Example #3Estimate the X, Y, and Z stiffness of the structure at the point 1000. (Note that, in general, the stiffness of a three-dimensional structure, condensed down to the stiffness of a single point, must be represented by a 6×6 stiffness matrix. As a first estimate, only the on-diag-onal, translational stiffnesses are often estimated, as is being done here.)


Select a job name (for example SUPP3) and enter the structural input processor as described earlier. The structural input screen appears.

At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters (using menu commands and/or toolbars) that define the model input. Input for the example is shown below:



Example Input

At any time during input the user can generate plots of the model executing Operations-Plot. Once the user is satisfied that the model has been entered properly, the model can be checked and saved with the File-Save command. If no fatal errors are found, then the CAESAR II execution files are written. The model may now be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.)

The structural input processor generates a number of lists to be used for documentation and checking. The Operations-List command generates the following printout for the job SUPP3.

Of particular interest in this model is the element orientation data that shows that the col-umns strong axis was indeed rotated 90 degrees. Also the free-end-connection lists show that the specification entered for the beams produced the desired results.

Operations-List



ELEMENTS & PROPERTIES

Index N1 N2 IGT IMT

1 5 10 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

2 10 15 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

3 15 20 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

4 25 30 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

5 30 35 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

6 35 40 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

7 45 50 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

8 50 55 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

9 55 60 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

10 65 70 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

11 70 75 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

12 75 80 1 1 .000 144 .000 .000

13 10 30 2 1 .000 .000 -168 .000

14 15 35 2 1 .000 .000 -168 .000

15 30 50 2 1 -120 .000 .000 .000

16 35 55 2 1 -120 .000 .000 .000

17 40 60 2 1 -120 .000 .000 .000

18 50 70 2 1 .000 .000 168 .000

19 55 75 2 1 .000 .000 168 .000

20 60 80 2 1 .000 .000 168 .000

21 70 10 2 1 120 .000 .000 .000

22 75 15 2 1 120 .000 .000 .000

23 80 20 2 1 120 .000 .000 .000

24 20 1000 2 1 .000 .000 -84 .000

25 40 1000 2 1 .000 .000 84 .000

NODAL FIXITIES

Index NOD FIXX FIXY FIXZ ROTX ROTY ROTZ

1 5 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

2 25 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

3 45 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

4 65 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

NODAL LOADS

Index NODE FORX FORY FORZ MOMX MOMY MOMZ

1 1000 10000. 10000. 10000. 0. 0. 0.

ELEMENT MATERIAL DATA

Index ID# E POIS G FY RH OALPHA(1,2,3)

1 1 .3000E+08 .30 .11000E+08 0.2830 .00000 .00000 .00000

ELEMENT GEOMETRY DATA



STRONG WEAK POLAR AXIS AXIS MOMENT OF

Index ID# NAME AREA INERTIA INERTIA INERTIA HEIGHT DEPTH

1 1 W12X65 19.1 533.00 174.00 2.19 12.12 12.00

2 2 W10X22 6.5 118.00 11.40 .24 10.17 5.75

ELEMENT ORIENTATION DATA

Index N1 N2 ANGLE(deg.)

1 5 10 90.00

2 10 15 90.00

3 15 20 90.00

4 25 30 90.00

5 30 35 90.00

6 35 40 90.00

7 45 50 90.00

8 50 55 90.00

9 55 60 90.00

10 65 70 90.00

11 70 75 90.00

12 75 80 90.00

"FROM" ELEMENT END "TO" ELEMENT END --TRANSL-----BENDING---------------TRANSL------BENDING---------

Index FROM TO AX STR WEAK TOR STR WEAK AX STR WEAK TOR STR WEAK

1 10 30 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE











12 20 1000 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX

13 40 1000 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX

When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. The user should change the current jobname to that of the structural filename. When this is done the Analysis-Static menu option should be selected. From this point structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis. Output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.

The displacement and force report for the (Force Only) load case follows. Note that the structure is stiffer in the X direction, even though the Z dimension is greater due to the ori-



entation of the columns. The Force/Moment report is particularly interesting given that all of the beams have pinned ends. Note that most of the beams carry no load. This is because the transfer of the load to the beams in this model is due to rotations at the column ends, and not translations. (Cross-braces would eliminate this problem and cause the beams to pick up more of the load.) The 1000 end of the elements from 20-1000 and from 40-1000 carries a moment because it is not a pinned end connection. 1000 is just a point at midspan for the application of the load.

CAESAR II DISPLACEMENT REPORT FILE:SUPP3

CASE 2 (SUS) FOR DATE:MAR 24,1993

-----Translations(in.)-----Rotations(deg.)----

NODE DX DY DZ RX RY RZ

5 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000

10 .6225 .0013 3.8135 2.8450 .0000 -.4644

15 2.1786 .0025 13.3473 4.5520 .0000 -.7432

20 4.2024 .0038 25.7412 5.1211 .0000 -.8363

25 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000

30 .6225 .0013 3.8135 2.8450 .0000 -.4644

35 2.1786 .0025 13.3473 4.5520 .0000 -.7432

40 4.2024 .0038 25.7412 5.1211 .0000 -.8363

45 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000

50 .6225 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 -.4644

55 2.1786 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 -.7429

60 4.2009 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 -.8355

65 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000

70 .6225 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 -.4644

75 2.1786 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 -.7429

80 4.2009 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 -.8355

1000 7.0909 .2828 25.7434 .0000 .0000 .0000

CAESAR II FORCE/STRESS REPORT FILE:SUPP3


DATA--Forces(lb.)--Moments(ft.lb.)-(lb./sq.in.)

POINT FX FY FZ MX MY MZ SIFI SIFO CODE ALLOW.

5 -2502 -5000 -5000 -180000 0 90009 .00 .00 0 0

10 2502 5000 5000 120000 0 -59979 .00 .00 0 0

10 -2491 -5000 -5000 -120000 0 59979 .00 .00 0 0

15 2491 5000 5000 60000 0 -30078 .00 .00 0 0

15 -2506 -5000 -5000 -60000 0 30078 .00 .00 0 0

20 2506 5000 5000 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0



25 -2502 -5000 -5000 -180000 0 90009 .00 .00 0 0

30 2502 5000 5000 120000 0 -59979 .00 .00 0 0

<>

30 -2491 -5000 -5000 -120000 0 59979 .00 .00 0 0

35 2491 5000 5000 60000 0 -30078 .00 .00 0 0

35 -2506 -5000 -5000 -60000 0 30078 .00 .00 0 0

40 2506 5000 5000 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

45 -2497 0 0 0 89990 .00 .00 0 0

50 2497 0 0 0 0 -60020 .00 .00 0 0

50 -2508 0 0 0 0 60020 .00 .00 0 0

55 2508 0 0 0 0 -29921 .00 .00 0 0

55 -2493 0 0 0 0 29921 .00 .00 0 0

60 2493 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

65 -2497 0 0 0 0 89990 .00 .00 0 0

70 2497 0 0 0 0 -60020 .00 .00 0 0

70 -2508 0 0 0 0 60020 .00 .00 0 0

75 2508 0 0 0 0 -29921 .00 .00 0 0

75 -2493 0 0 0 0 29921 .00 .00 0 0

80 2493 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

10 0 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

30 0 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

15 0 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

35 0 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

30 -10 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

50 10 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

CAESAR II FORCE/STRESS REPORT FILE:SUPP3


DATA--Forces(lb.)--Moments(ft.lb.)-(lb./sq.in.)

POINT FX FY FZ MX MY MZ SIFI SIFO CODE ALLOW.

35 14 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

55 -14 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0



40 2493 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

60 -2493 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

50 0 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

70 0 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

55 0 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

75 0 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

60 0 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

80 0 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

70 10 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

10 -10 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

75 -14 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

15 14 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

80 -2493 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

20 2493 0 0 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

20 -5000 -5000 -5000 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

1000 5000 5000 5000 35000 35000 0 .00 .00 0 0

40 -5000 -5000 -5000 0 0 0 .00 .00 0 0

1000 5000 5000 5000 35000 -35000 0 .00 .00 0 0

The first pass estimate of the stiffnesses are

Kx = 10000 lb. / 7.0909 in. = 1410 lb./in.

Ky = 10000 lb. / 0.2828 in. = 35360 lb./in.

Kz = 10000 lb. / 25.7434 in. = 388 lb./in.


�� ++,;)�� 8��

��%��((��)�� 8�� )�� 8�� 9��%�� 8�� 3��)�� +�;)�� <�� +�

�� )�)�� ) ��)�� %��((� ��)��'��<��5�)�)��)�� *

CAESAR II Underground Pipe Modeler CAESAR II - User’s Guide

CAESAR II Underground Pipe ModelerThe CAESAR II underground pipe modeler is designed to simplify the user’s input of buried pipe data. To achieve this objective the “Modeler” performs the following functions for the user:

• Allows for the direct input of soil properties. The “Modeler” contains the equations for buried pipe stiffnesses that are outlined later in this chapter. These equations are used to calculate first the stiffnesses on a per length of pipe basis, and then generate the restraints that simulate the discrete buried pipe restraint.

• Automatically breaks down straight and curved lengths of pipe to locate these soil restraints. CAESAR II uses a zone concept to break down straight and curved sec-tions. Where transverse bearing is a concern (near bends, tees, and entry/exit points), soil restraints are located in close proximity and where axial load dominates, soil restraints are spaced far apart.

• Allows for the direct input of user’s soil stiffnesses on a per length of pipe basis. Input parameters include axial, transverse, upward, and downward stiffnesses, as well as ultimate loads. The user can specify user-defined stiffnesses separately, or in conjunc-tion with CAESAR II’s automatically generated soil stiffnesses.

11-2 Buried Pipe Modeling

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Using the Underground Pipe Modeler

Using the Underground Pipe ModelerThe Buried Pipe Modeler is started by selecting an existing job, and then choosing menu option Input-Underground from the CAESAR II Main Menu. The Modeler is designed to read in a standard CAESAR II input data file that describes the basic layout of the pip-ing system as if it was not buried. From this basic input CAESAR II creates a second input data file that contains the buried pipe model. This second input file typically con-tains a much larger number of elements and restraints than the first job. The first job that serves as the “pattern” is termed the original job. The second file that contains the element mesh refinement and the buried pipe restraints is termed the buried job. CAESAR II names the buried job by appending a “B” to the name of the original job.

Note The original job must already exist and serves as the pattern for the buried pipe model building. Any restraints in the buried section will be removed by the mod-eler during the process of creating the buried model. Any additional restraints can be entered in the resulting buried model. The buried job, if it exists, is overwritten by the successful generation of a buried pipe model. It is the buried job that is eventually run to compute displacements and stresses.

When the Buried Pipe Modeler is initially started up, the following screen appears:

Buried Pipe Modeling 11-3

Using the Underground Pipe Modeler CAESAR II - User’s Guide

This spreadsheet is used to enter the buried element descriptions for the job. The buried element description spreadsheet serves several functions:

• It allows the user to define which part of the piping system is buried.

• It allows the user to define mesh spacing at specific element ends.

• It allows the input of user defined soil stiffnesses

Typical buried pipe displacements are considerably different than similar above ground displacements. Buried pipe deforms laterally in areas immediately adjacent to changes in directions (i.e. bends and tees). In areas far removed from bends and tees the deformation is primarily axial. The optimal size of an element (i.e. the distance between a single FROM and a TO node) is very dependent on which of these deformation patterns is to be modelled Not having a continuous support model, CAESAR II or the user, must locate additional point supports along a line to simulate this continuous support. So for a given stiffness per unit length, either many, closely spaced, low stiffness supports are added or a few, distant and high stiffness supports are added. Where the deformation is “lateral”, smaller elements are needed to properly distribute the forces from the pipe to the soil. The length over which the pipe deflects laterally is termed the “lateral bearing length” and can be calculated by the equation:

Lb = 0.75(π) [4EI/Ktr] 0.25

Where:

E = Pipe modulus of elasticity

I = Pipe moment of inertia

Ktr = Transverse soil stiffness on a per length basis, (defined later)

CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local load distribution. The bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The axial displacement lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 3 lengths, and the intermediate lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 2 lengths. Zone 3 ele-ment lengths (to properly transmit axial loads) are computed by 100*Do, where Do is the outside diameter of the piping. The Zone 2 mesh is comprised of up to 4 elements of increasing length; starting at 1.5 times the length of a Zone 1 element at its Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last which is 50*Do long at the Zone 3 end. A typical piping system, and how CAESAR II views this “element breakdown” or “mesh distribution” is illustrated on the following page.



Zone Definitions

A critical part of the modelling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone 1 (or lateral) bearing regions. These regions primarily occur:

• On either side of a change in direction

• For all pipes framing into an intersection

• At points where the pipe enters or leaves the soil

CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe framing into an elbow.

Note It is the user’s responsibility to tell CAESAR II where the other Zone 1 areas are in the piping system.



The left side of the Buried Element Description Spreadsheet is shown as follows:

Buried Element Description Spreadsheet

There are 13 columns in this spreadsheet (The eight not shown above carry the user-defined soil stiffnesses and ultimate loads). The first two columns contain the element node numbers for each piping element included in the original system. The second three columns are discussed in detail below:

Soil Model No.—This column is used to define which of the elements in the model are buried. A nonzero entry in this column implies that the associated element is bur-ied. A 1 in this column implies that the user wishes to enter user-defined stiffnesses (on a per length of pipe basis) at this point in the model. These stiffnesses must follow in the columns 6 through 13. Any number greater than 1 in the SOIL MODEL NO. column points to a CAESAR II soil restraint model generated (using the equations outlined later under Soil Models from user entered soil data).

From/ To End Mesh Type—A check in either of these columns implies that a lateral loading mesh should be placed at the corresponding element end. For example:

FROM TO SOIL FROM TONODE NODE MODEL MESH MESH5 10 2 √

The element 5 to 10 is buried. CAESAR II will generate the soil stiffnesses from user-defined soil dataset #2, and the node 5 end will have a fine mesh so that lateral bearing will be properly modelled.



Since CAESAR II automatically places lateral bearing meshes adjacent to all buried elbows, the user must only be concerned with the identification of buried tees and points of soil entry or exit. The figure below is illustrative:

Lateral Bearing Mesh Definitions

Please note the following:

• The user has separated the node numbers in the original piping system by 10’s or 20’s instead of the usual 5. This is so that CAESAR II can maintain the normal sequence of node numbers for the added moves.

• From/To Lateral Bearing mesh specifications are not needed for nodes 30, 110 and 130, since CAESAR II places lateral bearing meshes on each side of a bend by default.

• A lateral bearing mesh is not needed at 90 because there is no tendency for the model to deflect in any direction NOT axial to the pipe.

• The tendency for lateral deflection must be defined for each element framing into an intersection (node 50).



Command available in this module are

• File-Open—Opens a new piping file as the original job.

• File-Change Buried Pipe Job Name—Renames the buried job (in the event that the user does not wish to use the CAESAR II default of “B” appended to the original job name).

• File Print—Prints the element description data spreadsheet.

• Soil Models—Allows the user to specify soil data for CAESAR II to use in generating one or more soil restraint systems. This is described in detail below.

• Convert Input—Converts the original job into the buried job by mesh-ing the existing elements and adding soil restraints. The conversion pro-cess creates all of the necessary elements to satisfy the Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and places restraints on the elements in these zones accordingly. All elbows are broken down into at least two curved sections, and very long radius elbows are broken down into segments whose lengths are not longer than the elements in the immediately adja-cent Zone 1 pipe section. Node numbers are generated by adding “1” to the element’s FROM node number. CAESAR II checks before using a node number to make sure that it will be unique in the model. All densi-ties on buried pipe elements are zeroed, to simulate the continuous sup-port of the pipe weight. A conversion log is also generated, which details the process in full.

File-Open

File Print

Soil Models

Convert


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Notes on the Soil Model

Notes on the Soil ModelThe following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses and ultimate loads should be used only when the analyst does not have better data or methods suited to the particular site and problem. COADE’s soil restraint modeling algorithm is generally based on the ideas presented by L.C. Peng in his paper entitled “Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipelines,” published in 1978 in Pipeline Industry.

Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a yield stiffness. The yield stiffness is typically set close to zero, i.e. once the ultimate load on the soil is reached there is no further increase in load even though the displace-ment may continue. The two basic ultimate loads that must be calculated to analyze buried pipe are the axial and transverse ultimate loads. (Many researchers differentiate between horizontal, upward, and downward transverse loads, but when the variance in predicted soil properties and methods is considered, this differentiation is often not warranted. Note that CAESAR II allows the explicit entry of these data if so desired.)

Once the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in these directions can be determined by dividing the ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that the yield displacement is related to both the buried depth and the pipe diameter. The ultimate loads and stiffnesses computed are on a force per unit length of pipe basis.

The user enters soil data by executing the Soil Models Command. This option allows the user to specify the soil properties for the CAESAR II buried pipe equations.

Note Valid soil model numbers start with 2. Soil model number 1 is reserved for user-defined soil stiffnesses. Up to 15 different soil models may be entered for a single job.

Upon entry, the soil modeler dialog appears. Either the friction coefficient or the und-rained shear strength may be left blank. Typically for clays the friction coefficient would be left blank and would be automatically estimated by CAESAR II as Su/600 psf. Both sandy soils and clay-like soils may be defined here.

Soil Models


Notes on the Soil Model CAESAR II - User’s Guide

The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. (The TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal strain is used to compute and print the theoretical “virtual anchor length.”)

These equations are:

• Axial Ultimate Load (Fax)

Fax = µD[ (2ρsH) + (πρpt) + (πρf)(D/4) ]

Where:

µ = Friction coefficient, typical values are:

.4 for silt

.5 for sand .6 for gravel

.6 for clay or Su/600

Su = Undrained shear strength

D = Pipe diameter

ρs = Soil density

H = Buried depth to the top of pipe

ρp = Pipe density

t = Pipe nominal wall thickness

ρf = Fluid density

• Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr)

Where:

ϕ = Angle of internal friction, typical values are:

2 2tr sF = (0.5)( ��


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Notes on the Soil Model

27-45 for sand

26-35 for silt

0 for clay

OCM = Overburden Compaction Multiplier

If Su is given (i.e. have a clay-like soil), then Ftr as calculated above is multiplied by Su/250psf.

Note that since in many cases the stiffer the soil, the more conservative the results, Ftr is multiplied by the OCM as well. Many experienced pipeline engineers do not wish to add this "extra conservatism," and prefer to use values that are more in line with those that have been used in the past. To do this, the OCM is the parameter that is usu-ally adjusted.

Common practice has been to reduce it (from its default of 8) to values from 5 to 7, depending on the degree of compaction of the backfill. Backfill efficiency can be approximated by the Proctor Number, defined in most soils textbooks. (The Proctor Number is a ratio of unit weights.) The standard practice when the Proctor Number is known, is to multiply the default value 8 by the Proctor Number. This result should then be used as the compaction multiplier.

• Yield Displacement (yd):

yd= Yield Displacement Factor × (H+D)

Note The Yield Displacement Factor defaults to 0.015.

• Axial Stiffness (Kax) on a per length of pipe basis:

Kax=Fax / yd

• Transverse Stiffness (Ktr) on a per length of pipe basis:

Ktr=Ftr / yd

Once the user clicks OK, the soil data is saved in a file entitled .SOI.


Recommended Procedures CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Recommended ProceduresThe recommended procedure for using the buried pipe modeler is outlined below:

1. Select the original job and enter the buried pipe modeler. The original job must already exist, and will serve as the basis for the new buried pipe model. The original model should only contain the basic geometry of the piping system to be buried. Any existing restraints (in the buried portion) will be removed by the modeler. Any under-ground restraints can be added to the buried model. Rename the buried job if CAE-SAR II’s default name is not appropriate.

2. Enter the soil data using Soil Models.

3. Describe the sections of the piping system that are buried, and define any required fine mesh areas using the buried element data spreadsheet.

4. Convert the original model into the buried model by the activation of option Convert Input. This step produces a detailed description of the conversion.

5. Exit the Buried Pipe Modeler and return to the CAESAR II Main Menu. From here the user may perform the analysis of the buried pipe job.

A fairly simple buried-pipe example problem is shown in the following section. This example illustrates the features of the modeler and should in no-way be taken as a guide for recommended underground piping design.

Soil Models

Convert Input


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Original - Unburied - Model

Original - Unburied - Model

The following input listing represents the “unburied” model shown above.

Terminal nodes 100 and 1900 are above ground. Nodes 1250 and 1650 (on the sloped runs) mark the soil entry and exit points.


Original - Unburied - Model CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Soil Model Number 2, a sandy soil, is entered.

Elements 1250-1300 through 1600-1650 are buried using soil model number 2. Zone 1 meshing is indicated at the entry and exit points.



Clicking Convert starts the conversion to a buried model.

The screen listing can also be printed.



The original unburied model is shown along with the "buried" model below. Note the added restraints around the elbows and along the straight runs.

Note the bi-linear restraints added to the buried model. The stiffness used is based upon the distance to the next node.



Note that the first buried element, 1250-1251, has no density.

The buried job can now be analyzed.


�� +�,��7)� ��

��7)� �� '� )�� (��%��(��1�� ;��%��(��1�� &��+4>�@C�� %��= ��?��3>�� +21 ��.��/%�� ) �� +3��%�� 5�;�+� ��?�< ��A�� %�)�)�� %�� .��(%� �� !49�8��%8�� !3��(�2+4�@��)�� )� �= ��&2��(�2+>�@�� #��<��= �� 2��(�22+�@�� #��<��= �� 2&#�(�%�� 1��0��#�� >4��(�&24 �� >�

�� )��(�� *

Equipment and Component Evaluation CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Equipment and Component EvaluationThe CAESAR II equipment and component compliance analytical modules are executed from the CAESAR II Main Menu using the Analysis Menu. Vessels, flanges, turbines, compressors, pumps and heat exchangers can be checked for excessive piping loads in accordance with appropriate standards. Input is via tabbed spreadsheets, and help screens are available for each data cell (invoked with [F1] or the ? key). Output reports can be sent to the printer, terminal or files.

Often suction (inlet), discharge (exhaust), and extraction lines are analyzed for forces and moments in separate runs of a pipe stress program. Once all of the loadings for a particular piece of equipment are computed, the equipment program is executed to determine if these loads are acceptable in accordance with the governing code. The user enters the equip-ment’s basic geometry and the loads on its nozzles computed from the piping program. The equipment analysis determines if these loads are excessive.

One convenient feature of the CAESAR II equipment programs is that nozzles on equip-ment can be analyzed separately. Often times a user will only have suction side loads, and often the particular dimensions of the pump are unknown, or are difficult to obtain. In these cases, CAESAR II accepts zeros or “no-entries” for the unknown data and will still generate a “single-nozzle” equipment check report. Therefore, while overall compliance may not be evaluated, the user can still check the individual nozzle limits. This is a valu-able tool to have, as in this case the user is looking more for load guidance, rather than for some fixed or precise limit on allowables.

Analysis Menu

All of these program modules share the same interface for easy transition. The individual modules are described following section.

12-2 Equipment and Component Compliance

CAESAR II - User’s Guide Intersection Stress Intensification Factors

Intersection Stress Intensification FactorsWith this module, intersection stress intensification factors (SIFs) can be computed for any of the three-pipe type intersections available in CAESAR II:

Intersection Types

A sample input spreadsheet is shown below.

Intersection Stress Intensification Factors

Stress intensification factors are reported for a range of different configuration values.

Equipment and Component Compliance 12-3

Intersection Stress Intensification Factors CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Intersection Stress Intensification Factors - Report


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Bend Stress Intensification Factors

Bend Stress Intensification FactorsThis module provides a scratch pad for determining stress intensification factors (SIFs) for various bend configurations under different codes.

Bend stress intensification factors can be computed for

• Pipe bends without any additional attachments.These calculations are done exactly according to the piping code being used.

• Mitered pipe bends. These calculations are done exactly according to the piping code being used.

• Pipe bends with a trunnion attachment. These calculations are taken from the paper “Stress Indices for Piping Elbows with Trunnion Attachments for Moment and Axial Loads,” by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, in the PVP Vol. 129, 1987.

The bend stress intensification factor input spreadsheet is shown below:

Bend Stress Intensification Spreadsheet

Input here is fairly straight forward; if there is a question about a particular data entry, the help screens should be queried. In most cases data that does not apply is left blank. For


Bend Stress Intensification Factors CAESAR II - User’s Guide

example, to review the SIFs for a bend that does not have a trunnion, the three trunnion related input fields should be left blank.

Bend Stress Intensification Factors - Trunnion

Pressure Stiffening

The pressure stiffening option in the input is provided so the user can see the effect that pressure stiffening has on the bend’s flexibility factor and stress intensification factor. This option is controlled by the user in CAESAR II via the setup file, but is most commonly left to the default condition. The default is different for each piping code because some of the codes mention pressure stiffening explicitly and some do not.

Pressure stiffening has its most significant effect in larger diameter bends adjacent to sen-sitive equipment (compressors). Including pressure stiffening where it is not included by default will draw more of the system moment to the nozzle adjacent to the bend.

Flanges Attached to Bend Ends

This is essentially the number of rigid fittings that are attached to the end of the bend pre-venting the ovalization of the bend. It is the ovalization that provides for a large amount of the bend’s flexibility.

BS-806 (The British Power Piping Code) recommends that flanges or valves (or any rigid cross-sectional fitting) that are within two diameters of the ending weldpoint of the bend be considered as being attached to the end of the bend for this calculation.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Bend Stress Intensification Factors

Bends with Trunnions

There are certain limits that must be satisfied before SIFs can be calculated on trunnions. These limits come directly from the paper by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, and they are:

t/T ≥ 0.2 and t/T ≤ 2.0

D/T ≥ 20 and D/T ≤ 60

d/D ≥ 0.3 and d/D ≤ 0.8

Where:

t = Wall thickness of the trunnion

T = Wall thickness of the bend

d = Outside diameter of the trunnion

D = Outside diameter of the bend

Stress Concentrations and Intensifications

The stress intensification calculation for bends with trunnions is based on the relationship between the ASME NB stress indices C2, K2, and the B31 code “i” factor (or stress inten-sification factor). That relationship has long been taken to be

(m)(i) = (C2)(K2)

Where:

m = multiplier, usually either 1.7 or 2.

i = B31 stress intensification factor

C2 = ASME NB secondary stress index

K2 = ASME NB peak stress index

The peak stress index (K2) is commonly known as the “stress concentration factor,” and is so-called in CAESAR II. Simply put, this factor is the ratio of the highest point stress at an intensification (i.e. at an intersection or an elbow) and the nominal local computed stress at the same point. Peak stresses typically only exist in a very small volume of mate-rial, on the order of fractions of the wall thickness of the part.

Because most piping components are formed without crude notches, gross imperfections or other anomalies, the peak stress index is kept well in control. Where a smooth transition radius is provided which is at least t/2, where (t) is the characteristic thickness of the part, the peak stress index is typically taken as 1.0. At unfinished welds, sockets, and where no transition radius is provided the peak stress index approaches values of 2.0.

Note If the user enters a trunnion (where there will be a weld between the trunnion and the elbow), and does not enter a stress concentration factor (the third input for the trunnion), CAESAR II assumes a stress concentration factor of 2.0.


WRC 107 (Vessel Stresses) CAESAR II - User’s Guide

WRC 107 (Vessel Stresses)The Welding Research Council Bulletin 107 (WRC 107) has been used extensively since 1965 by design engineers to estimate local stresses in vessel/attachment junctions.

Note There are three editions of WRC 107 available from the program; the default is set by the user in the Configure-Setup option.

WRC 107 Bulletin provides an analytical tool to evaluate the vessel stresses in the imme-diate vicinity of a nozzle. This method can be used to compute the stresses at both the inner and outer surfaces of the vessel wall, and report the stresses in the longitudinal and circumferential axes of the vessel/nozzle intersection. The convention adopted by WRC


CAESAR II - User’s Guide WRC 107 (Vessel Stresses)

107 to define the applicable orientations of the applied loads and stresses for both spheri-cal and cylindrical vessels are shown in the figure below.

WRC Axes Orientation

It has also been a common practice to use WRC 107 to conservatively estimate vessel shell stress state at the edge of a reinforcing pad, if any. The stress state in the vessel wall when the nozzle has a reinforcing pad can be estimated by considering a solid plug, with an outside diameter equal to the O.D. of the reinforcing pad, subjected to the same nozzle loading.

T

C

2 L

A B

C

A

C

B

M T

V C

L V

Upper

Lower

L C

2 L

1 C

1

2

A

A

B B

C

C

D D

M AXIS L

C

1

V (or V )

V (or V )

(or M )

(or M )

M AXIS

M AXIS

M AXIS

P AXIS

M AXIS

M AXIS

M AXISM AXIS

P AXIS

M AXIS

SPHERICAL SHELLS

To Define WRC Axes:1) P-axis: Along the Nozzle centerline

and positive entering the vessel.2) M1-axis: Perpendicular to the nozzle

centerline along convenient globalaxis.

3) M2-axis: Cross the P-axis into the M1axis and the result is the M2-axis.

CYLINDRICAL SHELLS

To Define WRC Axes:1) P-axis: Along the Nozzle centerline and

positive entering the vessel.2) MC-axis: Along the vessel centerline and

positive to correspond with any parallel glo-bal axis.

3) ML-axis: Cross the P-axis with the MC axis and the result is the ML-axis.

To Define WRC Stress Points:u-upper, means stress on outside of vessel

wall at junction.l-lower, means stress on inside of vessel at

junction.A-Position on vessel at junction, along neg-

ative M1 axis.B-Position on vessel at junction, along posi-

tive M1 axis.

C-Position on vessel at junction, along posi-tive M2 axis.

D-Position on vessel at junction, along neg-ative M2 axis.

To Define WRC Stress Points:u-upper, means stress on outside of vessel wall at

junction.l-lower, means stress on inside of vessel at junc-

tion.A-Position on vessel at junction, along negative

MC axis.B-Position on vessel at junction, along positive

MC axis.C-Position on vessel at junction, along positive

ML axis.D-Position on vessel at junction, along negative

ML axis.

Note: Shear axis “VC” is parallel, and in the same direction as the bending axis “ML”.Shear axis “VL” is parallel, and in the opposite direction as the bending axis “MC”.



Note Before attempting to use WRC 107 to evaluate the stress state of any nozzle/ves-sel junction, the user should always make sure that the geometric restrictions lim-iting the application of WRC 107 are not exceeded. These vary according to the attachment and vessel types. The user is referred to the WRC 107 bulletin direc-tory for this information.

The WRC 107 method should probably not be used when the nozzle is very light or when the parameters in the WRC 107 data curves are unreasonably exceeded. Output from the WRC 107 program includes the figure numbers for the curves accessed, the curve abscissa, and the values retrieved. The user is urged to check these outputs against the actual curve in WRC 107 to get a “feel” for the accuracy of the stresses calculated. For example, if parameters for a particular problem are always near or past the end of the fig-ures curve data, then the calculated stresses may not be reliable.

The WRC 107 program can be activated by selecting Analysis - WRC 107/297 from the Main Menu. The user may be prompted to enter a job name, and then the following data entry screen appears:

Analysis - WRC 107

The input data is accumulated by the processor in four spreadsheets. The first sheet dis-plays the title block, the second and third sheets collect the vessel and the nozzle (attach-ment) geometry data, respectively. From the Vessel Data spreadsheet click the WRC 107 radio button. The WRC 107 Version Year and Use Interactive Control checkboxes can also be enabled from this spreadsheet.



The Hot and Cold Allowable Stress Intensities of the vessel as defined per ASME VII, Division 2 can be entered manually or updated from the Material Database by providing the Material Name and Operating Temperature in the corresponding fields. Any allowable values entered manually or modified by the user, display in red.

Vessel Data

C



Nozzle Data

The nozzle loading is specified on the last spreadsheet, according to specific load cases, which include sustained, expansion and occasional cases. These loads are found in the CAESAR II output restraint load summary under the corresponding load cases or may be extracted from the static output files automatically by clicking the Get From Output... button. The WRC 107 specific local input coordinate system has been incorporated into the program; so the loads may be input in either the Global CAESAR II convention, or in the Local WRC 107 coordinate system. To enter loads in WRC 107 convention, click the WRC 107 radio button. If the Global CAESAR II convention is used, the vessel and nozzle centerline direction cosines must be present. Note, the positive direction is the Nozzle cen-terline vector pointing from the nozzle connection towards the vessel centerline. The loads convention may be freely converted from global to local and back provided the direction cosines are present.



Nozzle Loads (SUS)

Notice that the curves in WRC Bulletin 107 cover essentially all applications of nozzles in vessels or piping; however, should any of the interpolation parameters, i.e. Beta, etc. fall outside the limits of the available curves, some extrapolation of the WRC method must be used. The current default is to use the last value in the particular WRC table. If one wishes to control the extrapolation methodology interactively, you may do so by changing the WRC 107 default from “USE LAST CURVE VALUE” to “INTERACTIVE CONTROL” on the Computation Control tab located inside the Configure-Setup module of the Main Menu or directly in the WRC 107 input file, on the Vessel Data tab.

After entering all data, the WRC 107 analysis may be initiated through the Analyze-WRC 107/297 menu option or by clicking the Local Stress Analysis button on the toolbar. CAESAR II will automatically performs the ASME Section VIII, Div. 2 sum-mation.

Output reports may be viewed at the terminal or printed.

Clicking the button, performs the initial WRC 107 calculation and summation and

sends the result to MicroSoft Word.

WRC 107 Stress Summations

Because the stresses computed by WRC 107 are highly localized, they do not fall immedi-ately under the B31 code rules as defined by B31.1 or B31.3. The Appendix 4-1 of ASME Section VIII, Division 2 (“Mandatory Design Based on Stress Analysis”) does however provide a detailed approach for dealing with these local stresses. The analysis procedure outlined in the aforementioned code is used in CAESAR II to perform the stress evalua-



tion. In order to evaluate the stresses through an elastic analysis, three stress combinations (summations) must be made:

• Pm

• Pm + Pl + Pb

• Pm + Pl + Pb + Q

Where Pm is defined as the general membrane stress due to internal pressure removed from discontinuities, and can be estimated for the vessel wall from the expression (PD) / (4t) for the longitudinal component and (PD) / (2t) for the hoop component, where P is the design pressure of the system. The allowable for Pm is kSmh where Smh is the allowable stress intensity (See CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for definition). The value of k can be taken from Table AD-150.1 of the code (which ranges from 1.0 for sustained loads to 1.2 for sustained plus wind loads or sustained plus earthquake loads). Pl is the local mem-brane stress at the junction due to the sustained piping loads, Pb is the local bending stress (defined as zero at the nozzle to vessel connections per Section VIII, Division 2 of ASME Code), while Q is defined as the secondary stress, due to thermal expansion piping loads, or the bending stress due to internal pressure thrust and sustained piping loads. The allow-able stress intensity for the second stress combination is 1.5kSmh, as defined by the Figure 4-130.1 of the Code, while Smh is the hot stress intensity allowable at the given design temperature. Both Pl and Q will be calculated by the WRC 107 program. The third combi-nation actually defines the “range” of the stress intensity, and its allowable is limited to 1.5(Smc+Smh). See the Technical Reference Manual for a detailed discussion.

This summation is done automatically following the WRC 107 analysis. This calculation provides a comparison of the stress intensities to the entered allowables, along with a cor-responding PASS-FAIL ruling. Failed items display in red.



The WRC 107 Analysis module can provide a graphical representation of the nozzle and its imposed loads. This can be accessed via the button on the toolbar.

WRC 107 Analysis Module

The displayed load case (SUS, EXP, OCC) can be varied by selecting from the choices listed on the drop-down menu.


WRC Bulletin 297 CAESAR II - User’s Guide

WRC Bulletin 297Published in August of 1984, Welding Research Council (WRC) 297 attempts to extend the existing analysis tools for the evaluation of stresses in cylinder-to-cylinder intersec-tions. WRC 297 differs from the widely used WRC 107 primarily in that WRC 297 is designed for larger d/D ratios (up to 0.5), and that WRC 297 also computes stresses in the nozzle and the vessel. (WRC 107 only computes stresses in the vessel.)

The CAESAR II WRC 297 module shares the same interface with WRC 107. To enable the WRC 297 analysis, from the Vessel tab, click the WRC 297 radio button. The module provides spreadsheets for vessel data, nozzle data, and imposed loads. Vessel and Nozzle data fields function the same way as those in WRC 107. Currently WRC 297 supports one set of loads. The loads may be entered in either Global CAESAR II convention, or in the Local WRC 107 coordinate system. If Global CAESAR II convention is selected vessel and nozzle direction cosines must be present in order to convert the loads into the Local WRC 297 convention as discussed in the WRC 297 bulletin.

Analysis - WRC 297


CAESAR II - User’s Guide WRC Bulletin 297

Nozzle Screen


WRC Bulletin 297 CAESAR II - User’s Guide

.

WRC 297 - Loads

The CAESAR II version of WRC 297 also adds the pressure component of the stress using Lame’s equations, multiplied by the stress intensification factors found in ASME Section VIII, Div. 2, Table AD-560.7. The pressure stress calculation is not a part of the WRC 297 bulletin, but is added here as a convenience for the user.

Note CAESAR II also utilizes, through the piping input processor, the nozzle flexibil-ity calculations described in WRC 297 refer to Chapter 3 of the Technical Refer-ence Manual.

When provided with the necessary input, CAESAR II calculates the stress components at the four locations on the vessel around the nozzle and also the corresponding locations on the nozzle. Stresses are calculated on both the outer and inner surfaces (upper and lower). These stress components are resolved into stress intensities at these 16 points around the connection. Refer to the WRC 107 discussion for more information on the allowable lim-its for these stresses and output processing.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations

Flange Leakage/Stress CalculationsThe Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations are started by selecting Main Menu option Anal-ysis-Flanges.

There have been primarily two different ways to calculate stress and one way to estimate leakage for flanges that have received general application over the past 20 years. The stress calculation methods are from the following sources:

• ASME Section VIII

• ANSI B16.5 Rating Tables

The leakage calculations were also based on the B16.5 rating table approach.

Leakage is a function of the relative stiffnesses of the flange, gasket and bolting. Using the B16.5 estimated stress calculations to predict leakage does not consider the gasket type, stiffness of the flange, or the stiffness of the bolting. Using B16.5 to estimate leakage makes the tendency to leak proportional to the allowable stress in the flange, i.e. a flange with a higher allowable will be able to resist higher moments without leakage. Leakage is very weakly tied to allowable stress, if at all.

The CAESAR II flange leakage calculation is COADE’s first attempt to improve upon the solution of this difficult analysis problem. Equations were written to model the flexi-bility of the annular plate that is the flange, and its ability to rotate under moment, axial force, and pressure. The results compare favorably with three dimensional finite element analysis of the flange junction. These correlations assume that the distance between the inside diameter of the flange and the center of the effective gasket loading diameter is smaller than the distance between the effective gasket loading diameter and the bolt circle diameter, i.e. that (G-ID) < (BC-G), where, G is the effective gasket loading diameter, ID is the inside diameter of the flange, and BC is the diameter of the bolt circle.

Several trends have been noticed as flange calculations have been made:

• The thinner the flange, the greater the tendency to leak.

• Larger diameter flanges have a greater tendency to leak.

• Stiffer gaskets have a greater tendency to leak.

• Leakage is a function of bolt tightening stress.

Input for the Flange Module is broken into four sections. The first section describes flange geometry.


Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Flange Analysis

The second section contains data on the bolts and gasket.



Bolts and Gasket

The third section is used to enter material and stress-related data.



Material and Stress Data

The fourth section contains the imposed loads.



Imposed Loads

Note on bolt tightening stress

This is a critical item for leakage determination and for computing stresses in the flange. The ASME code bases its stress calculations on a prespecified, fixed equation for the bolt stress. The resulting value is however often not related to the actual tightening stress that appears in the flange when the bolts are tightened. For this reason, the initial bolt stress input field that appears in the first section of data input, Bolt Initial Tightening Stress, is used only for the flexibility/leakage determination. The value for the bolt tightening stress used in the ASME flange stress calculations is as defined by the ASME code:

Bolt Load = Hydrostatic End Force + Force for Leaktight Joint

If the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress field is left blank, CAESAR II uses the value

where 45,000 psi is a constant and d is the nominal diameter of the bolt (correction is made for metric units).

This is a rule of thumb tightening stress, that will typically be applied by field personnel tightening the bolts. This computed value is printed in the output from the flange program. It is interesting to compare this value to the bolt stress printed in the ASME stress report (also in the output). It is not unusual for the “rule-of-thumb” tightening stress to be larger than the ASME required stress. When the ASME required stress is entered into the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress data field, a comparison of the leakage safety factors can be

45000 d( )⁄



made and the sensitivity of the joint to the tightening torque can be ascertained. Users are strongly encouraged to “play” with these numbers to get a feel for the relationship between all of the factors involved.

Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler

Only the following input parameters are required to get a leakage report. These parameters include

• Flange Inside Diameter

• Flange Thickness

• Bolt Circle Diameter

• Number Of Bolts

• Bolt Diameter

• Effective Gasket Diameter

• Uncompressed Gasket Thickness

• Effective Gasket Width

• Leak Pressure Ratio

• Effective Gasket Modulus

• Externally Applied Moment

• Externally Applied Force

• Pressure

The help screens (press [F1] or ? at the data cell) are very useful for all of the input items and should be used liberally here when there are questions. Unique input cells are dis-cussed as follows:

Leak Pressure Ratio

This value is taken directly from Table 2-5.1 in the ASME Section VIII code. This table is reproduced in the help screens. This value is more commonly recognized as “m”, and is termed the “Gasket Factor” in the ASME code. This is a very important number for leak-age determination, as it represents the ratio of the pressure required to prevent leakage over the line pressure.

Effective Gasket Modulus

Typical values are between 300,000 and 400,000 psi for spiral wound gaskets. The higher the modulus the greater the tendency for the program to predict leakage. Errors on the high side when estimating this value will lead to a more conservative design.

Flange Rating

This is an optional input, but results in some very interesting output. As mentioned above, it has been a widely used practice in the industry to use the ANSI B16.5 and API 605 tem-perature/pressure rating tables as a gauge for leakage. Because these rating tables are based on allowable stresses, and were not intended for leakage prediction, the leakage pre-dictions that resulted were a function of the allowable stress for the flange material, and



not the flexibility, i.e. modulus of elasticity of the flange. To give the user a “feel” for this old practice, the minimum and maximum rating table values from ANSI and API were stored and are used to print minimum and maximum leakage safety factors that would be predicted from this method. Example output that the user will get upon entering the flange rating is shown as follows:

EQUIVALENT PRESSURE MODEL ————————-

Equivalent Pressure (lb./sq.in.) 1639.85

ANSI/API Min Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1080.00

ANSI/API Max Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1815.00

This output shows that leakage, according to this older method, occurred if a carbon steel flange was used, and leakage did not occur if an alloy flange was used. (Of course both flanges would have essentially the same “flexibility” tendency to leak.)

The following input parameters are used only for the ASME Section VIII Division 1 stress calculations:

• Flange Type

• Flange Outside Diameter

• Design Temperature

• Small End Hub Thickness

• Large End Hub Thickness

• Hub Length

• Flange Allowables

• Bolt Allowables

• Gasket Seating Stress

• Optional Allowable Multipliers

• Flange Face & Gasket Dimensions

The flange type can be selected from the icons on the first spreadsheet.

Material allowables may be acquired from the Section VIII, Division 1 material library that is accessed from the pull-down list.

An input listing for a typical flange analysis is shown below:

C A E S A R I I MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO

Flange Inside Diameter [B](in.) 30.560

Flange Thickness [t](in.) 4.060

Flange Rating (Optional) 300.000

Bolt Circle Diameter (in.) 38.500



Number of Bolts 32.000

Bolt Diameter (in.) 1.500

Bolt Initial Tightening Stress(lb./sq.in.)

Effective Gasket Diameter [G] (in.) 33.888

Uncompressed Gasket Thickness (in.) 0.063

Basic Gasket Width [b0] (in.) 0.375

Leak Pressure Ratio [m] 2.750

Effective Gasket Modulus(b./sq.in.) 300,000.000

Externally Applied Moment (optional)(in.lb.) 24,000.000

Externally Applied Force (optional)(lb.) 1,000.000

Pressure [P](lb./sq.in.) 400.000

The following inputs are required only if the user

wishes to perform stress calcs as per Sect VIII Div. 1

Flange Type (1-8, see ?-Help or Alt-P to plot) 1.000

Flange Outside Diameter [A](in.) 41.500

Design Temperature°F 650.000

Small End Hub Thickness [g0](in.) 1.690

Large End Hub Thickness [g1](in.) 3.440

Hub Length [h](in.) 6.620

Flange Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000

Flange Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000

Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08

Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08

Bolt Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000

Bolt Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000

Gasket Seating Stress [y](lb./sq.in.) 3,700.000

Flange Allowable Stress Multiplier 1.000

Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier (VIII Div 2 4-1411.000



Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N

Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt OD(in.)34.500

Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID(in.)33.000

Gasket Outer Diameter (in.)36.000

Gasket Inner Diameter (in.)33.000

Nubbin Width (in.)

Facing Sketch1.000

Facing Column 2.000

Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N

Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt OD(in.) 34.500

Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID(in.) 33.000

Gasket Outer Diameter (in.) 36.000

Gasket Inner Diameter (in.) 33.000

Nubbin Width (in.)

Facing Sketch 1.000

Facing Column 2.000


Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines, B31G CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines, B31GThe B31G criteria provides a methodology whereby corroded pipelines can be evaluated to determine when specific pipe segments must be replaced. The original B31G document incorporates a healthy dose of conservatism and as a result, additional work has been per-formed to modify the original criteria. This additional work can be found in project report PR-3805, by Battelle, Inc. The details of the original B31G criteria as well as the modified methods are discussed in detail in this report.

CAESAR II implements these B31G computations from the Main Menu Analysis-B31G option. The user is then presented with two spreadsheets on which the problem specific data can be entered.

CAESAR II determines the following values according to the original B31G criteria and four modified methods.

These values are

• the hoop stress to cause failure

• the maximum allowed operating pressure

• the maximum allowed flaw length

The four modified methods vary in the manner in which the corroded area is estimated. These methods are

• .85dL—The corroded area is approximated as 0.85 times the maximum pit depth times the flaw length.

• Exact—The corroded area is determined numerically using the trapezoid method.

• Equivalent—The corroded area is determined by multiplying the average pit depth by the flaw length. Additionally, an equivalent flaw length (flaw length * average pit depth / maximum pit depth) is used in the computation of the Folias factor.

• Effective—This method also uses a numerical trapezoid summation, however, various sub lengths of the total flaw length are used to arrive at a worst case condition. Note that if the sub length which produces the worst case coincides with the total length, the Exact and Effective methods yield the same result.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines, B31G

The input screens from the B31G processor are shown below. All input cells have associ-ated help text for user convenience. Note that most of the data required by this processor is acquired through actual field measurements.

Data Spreadsheet



A maximum of twenty pit measurements may be entered on the Measurements spread-sheet.

Measurements Spreadsheet


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines, B31G

Once the data has been entered, the Analyze menu option initiates the computations. Atypical output report is shown as follows.

C A E S A R II MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO

PIPELINE REMAINING STRENGTH CALCULATIONS (B31G)

Pipe Nominal Diameter (in.) 24.000

Pipe Wall Thickness (in.). 365

Design Pressure (lb./sq.in.) 915.000

Material Yield Strength (lb./sq.in.) 41,800.000

Material Specified Min Yield Strength (lb./sq.in.) 35,000.000

Flaw Length (in.) 2.750

Measurement Increment (in.) .250

Factor of Safety (Fs) 1.000

Design Factor (F) 1.000

Measurements are (P)its or (T)hicknessesP

Measurement 1(in.) .000

Measurement 2 (in.) .136











Measurement 13 (in.)










OUTPUT:

FAILURE FAILURE MAX ALLOWED

METHODSTRESSPRESSUREDEFECT LENGTH

(lb./sq.in.) (lb./sq.in.) (in. )

1 B31G (.67dL) 31808.660 967.514 1.696

2 Modified (.85dL) 34599.210 1052.392 2.656

3 Exact Trapezoid 38883.270 1182.700 4.422

4 Equivalent Area 42660.720 1297.597 5.159

5 Effective Area 44758.970 1361.419 3.775

* NOTE, revised pressure can not exceed design pressure.

The data in the input and the resulting output are consistent with the example from the

PR-3-805 report on page B-19. For additional information or backup on these computa-tions, an intermediate computation file is generated.

For additional information on this processor, please refer to either the B31G document or the Battelle project report PR-3-805.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Expansion Joint Rating

Expansion Joint RatingCAESAR II provides a computation module which computes a limit for the total dis-placement per corrugation of an expansion joint. According to EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association), the maximum permitted amount of axial movement per cor-rugation is defined as erated where

ex + ey + eq < erated

The terms in the above equation are defined as:

ex = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed axial move-ments.

ey = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed lateral deflec-tions.

eq = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed angular rota-tion, i.e. bending.

erated = The maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation. This value should be obtained from the Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s catalog.

In addition, EJMA states,

“Also, [as an expansion joint is rotated or deflected laterally] it should be noted that one side of the bellows attains a larger projected area than the opposite side. Under the action of the applied pressure, unbalanced forces are set up which tend to distort the expansion joint further. In order to control the effects of these two factors a second limit is established by the manufacturer upon the amount of angular rotation and/or lateral deflection which may be imposed upon the expansion joint. This limit may be less than the rated movement. Therefore, in the selection of an expansion joint, care must be exercised to avoid exceeding either of these manufacturer’s limits.”

This CAESAR II computation module is provided to assist the expansion joint user in sat-isfying these limitations. This module computes the terms defined in the above equation and the movement of the joint ends relative to each other. These relative movements are reported in both the local joint coordinate system and the global coordinate system.

The expansion joint rating module can be entered by selecting Main Menu Analysis - Expansion Joint Rating option.

The user is then presented with two input spreadsheets on which the joint geometry and end displacements are specified.


Expansion Joint Rating CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Geometry Spreadsheet



Displacements and Rotation



A report displaying both the input echo and the output calculations is shown as follows. The units used for the coordinate and displacement values are the length units defined in the active units file. Rotations are in units of degrees.




EJMA EXPANSION JOINT RATING

Node Number for “FROM” end 120.000

Node Number for “TO” end 125.000

Number of Convolutions 4.000

Flexible Joint Length (in.)4.447

Effective Diameter(in.)4.996

X Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000

Y Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000

Z Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000


EJMA EXPANSION JOINT RATING

Node Number for “FROM” end 120.000

Node Number for “TO” end 125.000

Number of Convolutions 4.000

Flexible Joint Length (in.)4.447

Effective Diameter(in.)4.996

X Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000

Y Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000

Z Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000



X Coordinate of “to” end (in.)4.447

Y Coordinate of “to” end (in.).000

Z Coordinate of “to” end (in.).000

X Displacement of “from” end (in.).300

Y Displacement of “from” end (in.).250

Z Displacement of “from” end (in.).000

X Rotation of “from” end (deg).000

Y Rotation of “from” end (deg)1.222

Z Rotation of “from” end (deg).030

X Displacement of “to” end (in.)-.100

Y Displacement of “to” end (in.).120

Z Displacement of “to” end (in.).000

X Rotation of “to” end (deg).000

Y Rotation of “to” end (deg)-.020

Z Rotation of “to” end (deg).890

OUTPUT:

AXIAL DISPLACEMENTS PER CONVOLUTION

Axial Displacement.100

Axial Displacement due to Lateral .133

Axial Displacement due to Rotation.016

Axial Displacement TOTAL.250

RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END “i” WITH RESPECT TO END “j”

(Local Joint Coordinate System)

Relative Axial Displacement, “x”.401

Relative Lateral Displacement, “y”.158

Relative Bending, “theta” (deg)1.511

Relative Torsion (deg) .019

RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END “i” WITH RESPECT TO END “j”

(Global Piping Coordinate System)



Relative X Displacement-.399

Relative Y Displacement-.132

Relative Z Displacement.095

Relative Rotation about X (deg).000

Relative Rotation about Y (deg)-1.242

Relative Rotation about Z (deg).860

In the previous output, the axial displacement total in the report is the total axial displace-ment per corrugation due to axial, lateral, and rotational displacement of the expansion joint ends. This is the value that would be compared to the rated axial displacement per corrugation. If e(total) is greater than the rated axial displacement per corrugation, then there is the possibility of premature bellows failure. Be sure that the displacement rating from the manufacturer is on a per corrugation basis. If not then multiply the axial displacement total by the number of corrugations and compare this value to the manufacturer’s allow-able axial displacement. Note that most manufacturers allowed rating is for some set num-ber of cycles (often 10,000). If the actual number of cycles is less, then the allowed movement can often be greater. Similarly, if the actual number of cycles is greater than 10,000, then the allowed movement can be smaller. In special situations manufacturers should almost always be consulted because many factors can affect allowed bellows movement.

The “y” in the report is the total relative lateral displacement of one end of the bellows with respect to the other, and “theta” is the total relative angular rotation of one end of the bellows with respect to the other. (Note that CAESAR II does not include “x” into the denominator for the lateral displacement calculations as outlined in EJMA.


Structural Steel Checks - AISC CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Structural Steel Checks - AISCCode compliance for structural steel shapes is performed according to the AISC (Ameri-can Institute of Steel Construction) code. This code check uses the forces and moments at the ends of the structural members, computes stresses, and allowables, and determines a “unity check” value. If the “unity check” value is less than 1.0, the member is acceptable for the given loading conditions.

CAESAR II performs the AISC unity check according to either the 1977 or the 1989 edi-tion of the AISC code.

Note Member properties are obtained from the AISC data base and used to compute the actual and allowable stress values for the axial and bending terms comprising the “unity check” equations. The specific data base is set via CAESARS II’s - Con-figure-Setup module. The data base must be either AISC77.BIN or AISC89.BIN.

The CAESAR II program which performs the “unity check” calculations is invoked with the Main Menu option Analyze - AISC.

Global Parameters

Upon invoking this module, the user is presented with the Global Input spreadsheet.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Structural Steel Checks - AISC

Global Input Spreadsheet

This screen is used to enter data that applies to all members being evaluated. Particular fields are:

Structural Code

The entry in this field should be either AISC 1977 or AISC 1989 respectively. Users should set this entry to match the data base in use.

Allowable Stress Increase Factor

The Allowable Stress Increase Factor is a multiplication factor applied to the computed values of the axial and bending allowable stresses. Typically this value is 1.0. However, in extreme events the AISC code permits the allowable stresses to be increased by a factor. Normally a 1/3 increase is applied to the computed allowables, making the Allowable Stress Increase Factor = 1.33. Examples of extreme events are earthquakes and 100 year storms. For more details see the AISC code, section 1.5.6.



Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz

Cmy and Cmz are interaction formula coefficients for the strong and weak axis of the ele-ments (in-plane and out-of-plane).

1. 0.85 for compression members in frames subject to joint translation (sidesway).

2. For restrained compression members in frames braced against sidesway and not sub-ject to transverse loading between supports in the plane of bending:

0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2); but not less than 0.4

3. where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends, of that por-tion of the member unbraced in the plane of bending under consideration.

4. For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of loading and subject to transverse loading between supports, the value of Cmy may be determined by rational analysis. However, in lieu of such analysis, the following val-ues are suggested per the AISC code:

a. 0.85 for members whose ends are restrained against rotation in the plane of bend-ing

b. 1.0 for members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation in the plane of bending

Young’s Modulus

The slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this value is usually 29,000,000 psi.

Material Yield Strength

The specified minimum yield stress of the steel being used.

Bending Coefficient

The bending coefficient Cb shall be taken as 1.0 in computing the value of Fby and Fbz for use in Formula 1.6-1a. Cb shall also be unity when the bending moment at any point in an unbraced length is larger than the moment at either end of the same length. Otherwise, Cb shall be

Cb = 1.75 + 1.05(M1/M2) + 0.3(M1/M2)2 but not more than 2.3 where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends.

Form Factor Qa

The form factor is an allowable axial stress reduction factor equal to the effective area divided by the actual area. (Consult the latest edition of the AISC code for the current computation methods for the effective area.)

Allow Sidesway

The ability of a frame or structure to experience sidesway (joint translation) affects the computation of several of the coefficients used in the unity check equations. Additionally, for frames braced against sidesway, moments at each end of the member are required. Normally sidesway is allowed (i.e., the box is checked).



Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . .

This check box determines whether or not the AISC program attempts to resize specific members as a result of the unity check computations. Activating this option requires the user to specify a desired minimum unity check and a desired maximum unity check. If the computed unity check falls outside this range, the program resizes the member appropri-ately. The final member size is shown in the output report.

Minimum Desired Unity Check

This is a required entry if the redesign option has been activated. This entry defines the minimum acceptable unity check allowed. If a unity check falls below this point, the ele-ment is resized to a smaller shape.

Maximum Desired Unity Check

This is a required entry if the redesign option has been activated. This entry defines the maximum acceptable unity check allowed. If a unity check falls above this point, the ele-ment is resized to a larger shape.



Local Member Data

Local Member data must be entered for each member being evaluated.

Local Member Data Spreadsheet

Particular fields are the following:

Member Start Node

The member start node is the “i” end of a structural element. The node number entered should be an integer value between 1 and 32,000. This is a required entry.

Member End Node

The member end node is the “j” end of a structural element. The node number entered should be an integer value between 1 and 32,000. This is a required entry.

Member Type

The member type is the AISC shape label found in the AISC manual. The shape label is used to acquire the member geometric properties from the data base. The label entered in this field must match exactly the label in the data base for properties to be obtained. Use the on line help to list typical member designations.



Since many of the angle labels can be found in the single angles, the double angles (long legs back to back), and the double angles (short legs back to back), require an “angle type” to tell them apart. This cell should contain a D for double angles with equal legs, and dou-ble angles with long legs back to back. This cell should contain a B for double angles with short legs back to back.



In- And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz

The coefficients used to compute the strong and weak axis slenderness ratios, respectively are

Unsupported Axial Length

This length is the length used to determine the buckling strength of the member. Typically, this is the total length of the member.

Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)

This length is the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the strong axis of the member.

Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending)

This length is the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the weak axis of the member.

Double Angle Spacing

Double angles normally have a gap or space separating the adjacent legs. The spacing as defined in the AISC manual must be 0.0, .375, or .75 inches.

Young’s Modulus

The slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this value is usually 29,000,000 psi. This value of Young’s modulus overrides the value specified on the “global” input spreadsheet.

Material Yield Strength

The specified minimum yield stress of the steel being used. This value of the material yield strength overrides the value specified on the “global” input spreadsheet.

Axial Member Force

This is the force (tension or compression) which acts along the axis of the member. The sign of the number is not significant, since a worst case load condition will be assumed, i.e. all positive loads.

End Conditions Theoretical K Recommended Design K

fixed-fixed 0.5 0.65

fixed-pinned 0.7 0.8

fixed-sliding 1.0 1.2

pinned-pinned 1.0 1.0

fixed-free 2.0 2.1

pinned-sliding 2.0 2.0



In-Plane Bending Moment

The maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) which will cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member. The sign of the number is not sig-nificant, since a worst case load condition will be assumed, i.e. all positive loads.

Out-of-Plane Bending Moment

The maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) which will cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member. The sign of the number is not sig-nificant, since a worst case load condition will be assumed, i.e. all positive loads.

In-Plane “Small” Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the smaller of the two in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.

In-Plane “Large” Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the larger of the two in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.

Out-of-Plane “Small” Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the smaller of the two out-of-plane bending moments which cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member.

Out-of-Plane “Large” Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the larger of the two out-of-plane bending moments which cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member.

AISC Output Reports

The output reports can be directed to either the terminal or a printer. The output report begins with a one page summary describing the current global data and units. This sum-mary is shown on the following page:



AISC Output Summary

The remaining pages in the output report show the data for the individual members. The last column of the report contains the most important data (namely the unity check value) and the governing AISC equation. Two sample member output reports are shown in the following figures. The first report is applicable to jobs where sidesway is allowed, the sec-ond report is applicable to jobs where sidesway is prevented.

CAESAR II AISC UNITY CHECK PROGRAM VER 3.19 JOB: VER1

Licensed to: COADE ENGINEERING SOFTWARE, INC. DEALER/DEMO COPY

Processing Date: 8/4/1993

Time: 9:12

STRCT Data Base: AISC89.BINCode Year: 1989

Units File Name: ENGLISH

Current Length units: in.

Current Force units: lb.

Current Moment units: in.lb.

Current Stress units: lb./sq

Allowable Stress Increase Factor 1.000

In-Plane Stress Reduction Factor Cmy.850

Out-of-Plane Stress Reduction FactorCmz.850

Young’s Modulus 29,000,000.000

Material Yield Strength 36,000.000

Bending Coefficient Cb 1.000

Form Factor Qa 1.000

Generate intermediate calculation file (Y/N)N

Sidesway is ALLOWED



Member Output Report, Sidesway Permitted

Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Codes

There are not many differences between the 1977 and 1989 AISC code revisions that affect the unity check computation. The most noticeable difference between these two revisions is that the 1989 code provides a method for computing the unity check on single angles. This procedure (which was not addressed in the 1977 code) can be found in a spe-cial code section following the commentary. The steps necessary to compute the unity check for single angles can be followed by reviewing the message file (generated upon user request).

The other changes (differences) between these two code revisions deal with members in compression. Several constants for Qs have been altered, and a new factor “kc” has been added. “kc” is a compression element restraint coefficient defined in the 1989 edition of the code.

Because of these code differences, CAESAR II stores the name of the active data base in the input file for the AISC program when the data file is first created. Attempting to switch

CAESAR II AISC UNITY CHECK PROGRAM Ver 3.19 Job: VER1 Page 1

Member Axial Fy Lngth X UC 1 Unity Chk

i Node Bend Y Ky Lngth Y UC 2 Equation

j Node Bend Z Kz Lngth Z UC 3 Compact

W10X39 100,000. 36,000.00 30. .779 .830

1. 100,000. .80 30. .830 1.6-1b

2. 100,000. .80 30. .000 Yes

W8X40 100,000. 36,000.00 30. .767 .818

2. 100,000. .80 30. .818 1.6-1b

3. 100,000. .80 30. .000 Yes

W21X44 100,000. 50,000.00 60. .811 .821

3. 100,000. .80 60. .821 1.6-1b

4. 100,000. .80 60. .000 No

W16X40 100,000. 50,000.00 60. .720 .738

4. 100,000. .80 60. .738 1.6-1b

5. 100,000. .80 60. .000 No

W24X55 100,000. 50,000.00 120. .762 .762

5. 100,000. .80 120. .642 1.6-1a

6. 100,000. .80 120. .000 No


NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) CAESAR II - User’s Guide

data bases (or compute unity checks on angles using the 1977 code) will generate an error message and the program will abort. Users are urged to consult the applicable AISC man-uals when using this program.

NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)There are two types of force/moment allowables computed during a NEMA run:

• Individual nozzle allowables.

• Cumulative equipment allowables.

Each individual suction, discharge, and extraction nozzle must satisfy the equation:

3F + M < 500De

Where:

F = resultant force on the particular nozzle.

M = resultant moment on the particular nozzle.

De = effective nominal pipe size of the connection.

A typical discharge nozzle calculation is shown as follows:

INDIVIDUAL NOZZLE CALCULATIONS

NOZZLE NODE COMPONENTSRESULTANTSVALUES/ALLOWABLES(lbs. & ft.lb.)(lbs. & ft.lb.)

EXHAUST 50 FX = 1923F + M = 1216 FY= -7 F= 192

FZ = 11 500*(used) = 4,000

MX = -369 % OF ALLOW. = 30.40 MY= 522 M= 640

MZ = -39

For cumulative equipment allowables NEMA SM23 states "the combined resultants of the forces and moments of the inlet, extraction, and exhaust connections resolved at the centerline of the exhaust connection", be within a certain multiple of Dc; where Dc is the diameter of an opening whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of all of the individual equipment connections. A typical turbine cumulative (summation) equipment calculation is shown as follows:

SUMMATION CALCUATIONS

DIAMETER DUE TO EQUIVALENT NOZZLE AREA, DC = 8.944in.

NOZZLE LOADS SUMMATIONSALLOWABLES % OF ALLOW.STATUS lbs.&ft.lb.)

SFX = 84 50*DC = 447 18.79SFY = -74 125*DC = 1118 6.62SFZ = -82 100*DC = 894 9.17FC(RSLT) = 138SMX = -447 250*DC = 2236 20.00


CAESAR II - User’s Guide NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)

SMY = 170 125*DC = 1118 56.51SMZ = 631 125*DC = 1118 56.51MC(RSLT) = 792FC + MC/2 = 535 125*DC = 1118 47.85

SFX, SFY, and SFZ are the respective components of the forces from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle. FC(RSLT) is the result of these forces. SMX, SMY and SMZ are the respective components of the moments from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle. Dc is the diameter of the equivalent opening as discussed above.

NEMA Turbine Example

Consider a turbine where node 35 represents the inlet nozzle and node 50 represents the outlet nozzle.

The output from a CAESAR II analysis of this piping system includes the forces and moments acting on the pipe elements that attach to the turbine:

To find the forces acting on the turbine at points 35 and 50 simply reverse the sign of the forces that act on the piping:

LOADS ON TURBINE @ 35 -108 -67 -93 -162 47 481

LOADS ON TURBINE @ 50 192 -7 11 -369 522 -39

Aside from the description, there is only one input spreadsheet for the NEMA turbine. Applied loads should be entered in global coordinates or extracted directly from the CAESAR II output file (using the on-screen button). This interface enables iterative addi-tion of an arbitrary number nozzles to the model. To add a nozzle, click the Add Nozzle button.

NODE FX FY FZ MX MY MZ

30 -108 -49 -93 73 188 603

35 108 67 93 162 -47 -481

50 -192 7 -11 369 -522 39

55 192 -63 11 78 117 -56



NEMA Input Inlet



NEMA Input Exhaust

The first page of the output is the input echo, the second and some of the remaining pages display the individual nozzle calculations while, the last page displays the summation cal-culations.

Note The actual number of output pages will vary and depends on the number of noz-zles defined in the input.



NEMA Input Echo Report

The NEMA output report for the above turbine example shows that the turbine passed. The highest summation load is only 56% of the allowable. If the turbine had failed, the symbol **FAILED** would have displayed, in red, under the “STATUS” column opposite to the load combination that was excessive.



NEMA Output Nozzle Calculations



NEMA Output Summation Calcs


CAESAR II - User’s Guide API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps)

API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps)In August of 1995, API released the 8th edition of API 610 for centrifugal pumps for gen-eral refinery service.

The API 610 load satisfaction criteria is outlined below:

If clause F.1.1 is satisfied, then the pump is O.K. Clause F.1.1 states that the individual component nozzle loads must fall below the allowables listed in the Nozzle Loadings table (Table 2) shown below:

If clause F.1.1 is NOT satisfied, but clauses F.1.2.1, F.1.2.2, and F.1.2.3 ARE satisfied then the pump is still O.K.

Clause F.1.2.1 states that the individual component forces and moments acting on each pump nozzle flange shall not exceed the range specified in Table 2 by a factor of more than 2. Referring to the API 610 report, the user can see if F.1.2.1 is satisfied by compar-ing the Force/Moment Ratio to 2. If the ratio exceeds 2, the nozzle status is reported as “FAILING”.

The F.1.2.2 and the F.1.2.3 requirements give equations relating the resultant forces and moments on each nozzle, as well as on the pump base point respectively. The requirements of these equations, and whether or not they have satisfied API 610, are shown on the bot-tom of the report.

The following example is taken from the API 610 code and shows the review of an over-hung end-suction process pump in English units. The three CAESAR II input screens are shown, followed by the program output.


API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) CAESAR II - User’s Guide

API 610 Input Data



API 610 Suction Nozzle



API 610 Discharge Nozzle



CAESAR II VERSION : 3.24

API 610 (8th Edition)File : APITST8A

Date : FEB 28,1997

User Entered Description :Time : 11:31 am

API-610 8TH example F.5.1.1 from page F-4.

Note, API input transformed into CAESAR II

global coordinate system for input.

Node # OrientationNominal Diameter

Suction Nozzle 1 End10

Discharge Nozzle 4 Top8

Table 2 Allowable ( ratio ) = 2.00

Pump Axis is in the X direction.

(Local Coordinates) SuctionTable 2 Force & Moment Status Values Ratios

X Distance = 10.5 in.

Y Distance = 0.0 in.

Z Distance = 0.0 in.

X Force = 2900.0 lb. 1500 1.93 Passed

Y Force = 0.0 lb. 1200 0.00 Passed

Z Force = -1,990.0 lb. 1,000 1.99 Passed

X Moment =- 1,000.0 ft.lb. 3,700 0.27 Passed

Y Moment = -3,599.0 ft.lb. 1,800 2.00 Passed

Z Moment =- 5,500.0 ft.lb. 2,800 1.96 Passed

(Local Coordinates)DischargeTable 2Force & MomentStatus

Values Ratios

X Distance = 0.0 in.

Y Distance = -12.2 in.



Z Distance = 15.0 in.

X Force = 1,600.0 lb. 850 1.88 Passed

Y Force = -100.0 lb. 700 0.14 Passed

Z Force = 1,950.0 lb. 1100 1.77 Passed

X Moment = 500.0 ft.lb. 2,600 0.19 Passed

Y Moment =-2,500.0 ft.lb. 1,300 1.92 Passed

Z Moment =-3,600.0 ft.lb. 1,900 1.89 Passed

Check of Condition F.1.2.2 Requirement Status

(FRSa/1.5FRSt2) + (MRSa/1.5MRSt2) = 1.952 < or = 2.00 Passed

(FRDa/1.5FRDt2) + (MRDa/1.5MRDt2)= 1.919 < or = 2.00 Passed

Check of Condition F.1.2.3 Requirement Status

1.5 ( FRSt2 + FRDt2 ) = 5,640. > 4,501. (FRCa) Passed

2.0 ( MZSt2 + MZDt2 ) = 6,200. >-2,358. (MYCa) Passed

1.5 ( MRSt2 + MRDt2 ) = 12,750. > 8,180. (MRCa) Passed

Overall Pump Status ** PASSED **



Vertical In-Line Pumps

Note that on the first screen there is a check box for a vertical in-line pump. This is to be used when the pump is the vertical in-line type supported only by the attached piping. API states that if this is the case then 2.0 times the loads from Table 2 can be used. However, even if the pump fails the 2.0 Table 2 criteria, it may still pass. If the principal stress on the nozzle is less than 6,000 psi, then that nozzle passes. If the principal stress on either nozzle is greater than 6,000 psi, the overall status will be reported as “Failed.”

In API 610 there is an example problem which illustrates the way that the stresses are computed on these in-line pump nozzles. The two basic equations for determining stress are

• Normal stresses (s) = Force / Area + Moment / Section Modulus

• Shear Stresses (t) = Force / Area + Torque * distance / J

Where J is the polar moment of inertia.

In equation number 2, both terms of the equation will always add together. On the other hand, the Force/Area term in equation 1 will depend on the sign of the force (tension or compression) that the user enters in the force and moment spreadsheet. The sign of the force is determined from the user-entered Centerline Direction Cosine, which for vertical in-line pumps should be entered in the direction extending from the discharge to the suc-tion nozzle. The distances that are usually entered for pedestal mounted pumps can be left blank since they are not used.


API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) CAESAR II - User’s Guide

API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)

The requirements of this standard are identical to those of NEMA SM-23 (1991), except that all of the NEMA allowables are increased by 85%.

API 617 Allowables = 1.85 * NEMA SM-23 Allowables

The input screens for this evaluation are shown below:

API 617 Input


CAESAR II - User’s Guide API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)

API 617 Suction/Discharge Input


API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) CAESAR II - User’s Guide

API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers)

This calculation covers the allowed loads on the vertical, co-linear nozzles (item 9 in the figure) found on most single, or multi-bundled air cooled heat exchangers.

The several figures from API 661 illustrate the type of open exchanger body analyzed by this standard.

API 661 Heat Exchangers

The input for API 661 is self-explanatory.

The “Heat Exchangers” figure and the Resultant Force/Multiplier inputs for Spreadsheet #1 are optional (default equals 1).

The two requirements for API 661 to be satisfied are as follows:

5.1.11.1 - “Each nozzle in the corroded condition shall be capable of withstanding the moments and forces defined in Heat Exchangers figure.”

5.1.11.2 - The sum of the forces and moments on each fixed header (i.e. each individual bundle) will be less than 1,500 lb. transverse to the bundle, 2,500 lb. axial to the bundle, and 3,000 pound axial on the nozzle centerline. The allowed moments are 3,000, 2,000,


CAESAR II - User’s Guide API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers)

and 4,000 ft.lb. respectively. “This recognizes that the application of these moments and forces will cause movement and that this movement will tend to reduce the actual loads.”

API 661 Input Data



API 661 Inlet Nozzle Data


CAESAR II - User’s Guide API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers)

API 661 Outlet Nozzle Data



A typical API 661 report is shown as follows:

Y Distance =18.0

X Force =100.0 1280. 0.08 PASSED

Y Force =-302.0 3,000. -0.10 PASSED

Z Force =50.0 1,800. 0.03 PASSED

X Moment =203.0 2,250. 0.09 PASSED

Y Moment =300.0 4,500. 0.07 PASSED

Z Moment =2,300.01,650. 1.39 FAILED

Discharge Table 3 Force & MomentStatusValues Ratios

Y Distance =0.0

X Force =0.0 1,280. 0.00 PASSED

Y Force =0.0 3,000. 0.00 PASSED

Z Force =0.0 1,800. 0.00 PASSED

X Moment =0.0 2,250. 0.00 PASSED

Y Moment =0.0 4,500. 0.00 PASSED

Z Moment =0.0 1,650. 0.00 PASSED

Resultant Force/Moment Check :

Resultant Table AllowableRatios Status

X Force =100.0 2,250. 0.04 PASSED

Y Force =-302.0 4,500. 0.07 PASSED

Z Force =50.0 3,750. 0.01 PASSED

X Moment =278.0 4,500. 0.06 PASSED

Y Moment =300.0 6,000. 0.05 PASSED

Z Moment =2,150.0 3,000. 0.72 PASSED

Overall Loading Status ** FAILED **.


CAESAR II - User’s Guide Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwa-

Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater HeatersThis module of the CAESAR II Rotating Equipment program provides a method for eval-uating the allowable loads on shell type heat exchanger nozzles. Section 3.14 of the HEI bulletin discusses the computational methods utilized to compute these allowable loads.

The method employed by HEI is a simplification of the WRC 107 method, in which the allowable loads have been linearized to show the relationship between the maximum per-mitted radial force and the maximum permitted moment vector. If this relationship is plot-ted (using the moments as the abscissa and the forces as the ordinate), a straight line can be drawn between the maximum permitted force and the maximum permitted moment vector, forming a triangle with the axes. Then for any set of applied forces and moments, the nozzle passes if the location of these loads falls inside the triangle. Conversely, the nozzle fails if the location of the loads falls outside the triangle.

The CAESAR II HEI output has been modified to include both the plot of the allowables and the location of the current load set on this plot.

The HEI bulletin states that the effect of internal pressure has been included in the com-bined stresses; however, the effect of the pressure on the nozzle thrust has not. This requires combination with the other radial loads. CAESAR II automatically computes the pressure thrust and adds it to the radial force if the Add Pressure Thrust checkbox is checked.

A sample input for the HEI module is shown below. Note that since the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force will be computed and combined with the radial force.


Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters CAESAR II - User’s Guide

HEI Nozzle/Vessel Input


CAESAR II - User’s Guide API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)

API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)This module of the CAESAR II Rotating Equipment program provides a method for eval-uating the allowable loads on Fired Heaters.

Input consists of the tube nominal diameter and the forces and moments acting on the tube, as shown in the figure below:

API 560 Input Data


API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) CAESAR II - User’s Guide

Upon execution of the analysis, CAESAR II compares the input forces and moments to the allowables as published in API 560. Example output is shown below.

API 560 Equipment Report



Index

Numerics3D HOOPs Graphics U10-93D/HOOPS Graphics in the Animation Proces-sor U9-143D/HOOPS Graphics in the Output ProcessorU7-233D/HOOPS in the Animation Processor U9-14

AAbout the CAESAR II documentation 1-4ABS U6-25ABS Method U8-18Acceptance of terms of agreement by the user1-2Actual cold loads U6-27Advanced U8-34, U8-38Advanced parameters U8-19Advanced parameters show screen U8-10AISC code comparisons U12-49AISC database U10-5AISC output reports U12-47AISC unity checks

Allow sidesway U12-42Allowable stress increase factor U12-41Bending coefficient U12-42Double angle spacing U12-46Fixity coefficients U12-46Form factor qa U12-42Member type U12-44Stress reduction factors U12-42Structural code U12-41

Algebraic U6-24Allowable stress increase factor U12-41Allowable stresses U5-15Alpha tolerance U5-6Ambient temperature U5-6Analysis menu U4-6Analyzing the dynamics job

Eigensolver U8-40Mode shapes U8-40

Performing a harmonic analysisForcing frequency U8-40

Phase angle U8-40Performing a modal analysis

Eigensolver U8-39Frequency cutoff U8-39Modes of vibration U8-39Natural frequencies U8-39Sturm sequence check U8-39

Performing a spectral analysisMass participation factors U8-41

Selection of phase anglesHarmonic results U8-41Harmonic stress U8-41

Angle spacing, double U12-46Animation

Motion U7-28Animation of Dynamic Results odal/Spec-trum U9-16Animation of Dynamic ResultsHarmonic U9-16Animation of Dynamic Resultsime History U9-16Animation of static results U7-28Animation of Static Results - DisplacementsU9-15ANSI B16.5 U12-24API 560 (fired heaters for general refinery ser-vices) U12-73API 605 rating tables U12-24API 610

Centrifugal pumpsLoad Satisfaction Criteria, API 610

U12-57API 610 (centrifugal pumps) U12-57API 617 (centrifugal compressors) U12-64API 661 (air cooled heat exchangers) U12-66Application guide 1-4Applications of CAESAR II 1-2Archive U6-14Archiving and reinstalling 1-8ASCE #7 wind loads U6-10ASCE7 U8-24Autorun U2-22

1


Autorun feature U2-2Autorun feature, Re-enabling U2-22Auxiliary data area U5-9Auxiliary data fields

Auxiliary screens U5-9Expansion joint

Effective diameter of bellows U5-10Pressure thrust in expansion joints U5-

10Available commands U6-5Axial length, Unsupported U12-46Axial member force U12-46

BB31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Re-sponse Spectrum U8-27Backfill U11-11Backfill efficiency U11-11Bandwidth U6-13Basic load cases U6-18Basic operation U3-5Batch run U6-2Bend data U5-9Bend stress intensification factors U12-5Bending coefficient U12-42Bending moment, In-plane U12-47Bending moment, Out-of-plane U12-47Bending stress U12-14Bends with trunnions U12-7Bilinear springs U11-9Bilinear supports U11-9Bolt tightening stress U12-23Bolts and gasket U12-21Boundary conditions U5-7, U9-12Browse CD Rom U2-15Browser U2-15BS-806 U12-6Building static load cases U6-7Building the load cases U3-11Builds, Version 1-6Buried pipe displacements U11-4Buried pipe example U11-13Buried pipe restraints U11-3

CCADWorx/PIPE 1-3CAESAR II Technical Changes 1-11CAESAR II, About 1-2Center of gravity report U3-11

Tutorial U3-11Checking the installation U2-12Code compliance U8-5Code Compliance Report U7-11Code Stress Colors by Percent U7-26Code Stress Colors by Value U7-26Code stresses for dynamics U9-7Cold loads U6-27Column reports U7-5Combination load cases U6-18Combination Method U8-18Combination Methods U6-24Commands U6-5Concentrated forces U8-2Configuration U2-12Connecting nodes U10-22Construction element U5-6Contact information U2-18Control parameters U8-5, U8-10, U8-13, U8-19, U8-34, U8-38Corroded pipelines, B31G

Calculating corroded area U12-28Flaw Length U12-28

Cumulative usage U9-8Cumulative Usage Report U7-12Customizable Toolbar U5-3Customize Toolbar U5-3Cutoff frequency U8-10Cyclic stress range U8-2

DDamping U8-13Data fields U5-3Definition of a load case U6-16Deflected Shape U7-23Densities U5-8Design

CADWorx/PIPE 1-3Diagnostics menu U4-9Disclaimer - CAESAR II 1-4

2


Disp U6-22Disp/Force/Stress U6-22Disp/Stress U6-22Displacement load case U6-26Displacement submenu U7-19Displacements U5-12, U7-6, U9-5DLF spectrum generator U8-31DLF/Spectrum Generator U8-21DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wiz-ard U8-21Double angle spacing U12-46Driving frequencies U8-5Dynamic amplitude U8-2Dynamic analysis input processor U8-6

Dynamic analysis types U8-7Dynamic input commands U8-8Initiating dynamic input U8-6Prerequisites for dynamic input U8-6

Dynamic capabilitiesHarmonic analysis U8-2

Concentrated forces U8-2Cyclic stress range U8-2Dynamic amplitude U8-2Equipment start-up U8-2Fluid pulsation U8-2Forcing frequencies U8-2Phase angle U8-2Rotating equipment U8-2Vibration U8-2

Modal analysis U8-2Mode shapes U8-2Natural frequency U8-2

Spectrum analysis U8-2Impulse analysis U8-2Relief valve U8-2Response spectrum method U8-2Response vs. frequency spectra U8-2Sustained stresses in spectrum analysis

U8-2Time history analysis U8-3

Dynamic capabilities in CAESAR II U8-2Dynamic imbalance U8-12Dynamic load case number U8-18Dynamic load factor U8-20Dynamic load specification U8-5

Dynamic output processor U9-2Boundary conditions U9-12

Friction resistance U9-12Nonlinear restraints U9-12

Forces/stresses, dynamics U9-8Global forces, dynamics U9-7Harmonic results U9-2

General results U9-3Included mass data U9-11

% Force active U9-12% Force added U9-12% Mass included U9-11Extracted modes U9-11Missing mass correction U9-11System response U9-11

Local forces, dynamics U9-6Mass model U9-12

Lumped masses U9-12Mass participation factors U9-9Modes mass normalized U9-10Modes unity normalized U9-10Natural frequencies U9-10Report types, dynamics

Displacements, dynamic output U9-5Report options U9-5

Restraints, dynamics U9-5Maximum load on restraints U9-5Maximum modal contribution U9-5Mode identification line U9-5

Spectrum results U9-3Static/dynamic combinations U9-3

Stresses, dynamics U9-7Code stresses for dynamics U9-7Stress intensification factors U9-7Stress report U9-7

Time history results U9-3Dynamic responses U8-3

EEarthquake (spectrum) U8-14Earthquake input spectrum

Spectrum definitions U8-14Response spectrum table U8-14Shock definition U8-14Spectrum data U8-14

3


Spectrum name U8-14Spectrum load cases

Earthquake U8-16El Centro earthquake data U8-17Independent support motion U8-17

Spectrum load cases example U8-17Static/dynamic combinations

ABS U8-18Combination method U8-18Hanger sizing for dynamics U8-18Occasional allowable stress U8-18Occasional dynamic stresses U8-18Occasional Stress U8-18Piping codes for earthquakes U8-18SRSS U8-18Sustained static stresses U8-18

Earthquakes U8-32Edit menu U5-24Effective diameter U5-10Effective gasket modulus U12-24Eigensolution U8-5Eigensolver U8-39, U8-40EJMA (expansion joint manufacturers associa-tion) U12-33El centro U8-15Element Direction Cosines U5-4Element length U11-4Element lengths U5-4End connections U10-7Entering the dynamic analysis input menu U8-6Entire agreement 1-3Entry into the processor U9-2Entry into the static output processor U7-2Equipment and component evaluation U12-2

Bend SIFsTrunnion U12-6

Bends with trunnionsTrunnions U12-7

Equipment checks U12-2Flanges attached to bend ends

BS-806 U12-6Flexibility U12-6Ovalization U12-6

Intersection SIFs U12-3

Pressure stiffeningFlexibility factor U12-6Stress intensification factor U12-6

Stress concentrations and intensificationsPeak stress index U12-7Stress concentration factor U12-7Trunnion U12-7

Equipment start-up U8-2Error checking U6-2

Commands, error checking U6-5Errors, warnings, and notes U6-2

Error checking the model U3-10Error handling and analyzing the job U8-39Errors

Errors and warnings U3-10ESL U2-9, U8-39ESL drivers U2-17ESL installation on a network U2-20ESL menu U4-10Excitation frequency U8-11Executing static analysis U3-13Execution of static analysis U6-12Exit U2-19Expansion joint U5-7, U5-10, U5-28Expansion joint rating U12-33

Ejma U12-33Maximum axial movement U12-33Maximum lateral deflection U12-33Maximum rotation U12-33Output U12-36

Expansion load cases U3-11, U6-26External software lock

ESL updating U4-10Local ESL U2-20Network ESL U2-20

Extracted modes U9-11

FFatal error dialog U6-3Fatigue (FAT) U6-8, U6-17Fatigue curve U5-15Fatigue curve data U5-16Fatigue curve dialog U5-16Fatigue failure U9-8Fatigue load cases U9-8

4


Fatigue loadings U7-12Fatigue stress types U6-8, U8-11, U8-17, U9-8Fatigue-type load cases U7-12File menu U4-3, U5-22Fixity coefficients ky and kz U12-46Fixity coefficients, AISC U12-46Flange leakage/stress calculations U12-19

Flange leakage U12-19Methodology U12-19

Flange ratingANSI B16.5 U12-24API 605 U12-24Rating Tables U12-24

Leak pressure ratioGasket Factor U12-24

Flange modeler U12-24Flange rating U12-24Flanges attached to bend ends U12-6Flaw length U12-28Flexible nozzles U5-19Fluid pulsation U8-2Force U6-22Force sets U8-5, U8-32, U8-35, U8-37Force spectrum methodology U8-20Force Stress U6-22Forces U5-13Forces/moments submenu U7-20Forces/stresses U9-8Force-time profiles U8-35, U8-36Forcing frequency U8-2, U8-40Form factor QA U12-42Frequency U8-13Frequency cutoff U8-39Friction effects U8-4Friction Multiplier U6-23Friction resistance U9-12Friction restraints U8-4Friction stiffness U8-4Full run 1-9

GGasket factor U12-24Generate files U6-5Global element forces U7-7Global forces U9-7

Global parameters U12-40Graphical output U7-18

HHanger U5-20, U6-27Hanger Design U6-23Hanger design control data U5-30Hanger selection

Actual cold loads U6-27Additional hanger U6-27Design load cases U6-27Hanger sizing load cases U6-27Hot load U6-27Operating load cases U6-27Recommended load cases U6-27Restrained weight U6-27Spring hanger design U6-27

Hanger sizing U6-27, U8-18Hardware requirements U2-3Harmonic U8-11, U8-40Harmonic analysis U8-2, U8-5Harmonic analysis input

Harmonic displacements U8-12Harmonic forces U8-11Harmonic load definition U8-11

Excitation frequency U8-11Phasing of harmonic loads

Damping U8-13Frequency U8-13Harmonic control parameters U8-13Harmonic force U8-13Pressure wave U8-12Reciprocating pumps U8-12Rotating equipment U8-12

Harmonic control parameters U8-13Harmonic displacements U8-12Harmonic force U8-11, U8-13Harmonic loads U8-11Harmonic results U8-41, U9-2Harmonic stress U8-41Heat exchangers U12-66HEI standard for closed feedwater heaters U12-71Help menu U4-11Hoops license grant 1-5

5


Hot load U6-27Html help facility U2-16

IIBC U8-25IGE/TD/12 U5-5Impulse U8-33Impulse analysis U8-2Included mass data U9-11Incore solution U6-12Independent support motion U8-17Index numbers, structural steel input U10-5In-plane bending moment U12-47In-plane large bending moment U12-47In-plane small bending moment U12-47Input listing U9-12Input menu U4-5Input overview based on analysis category U8-9Installation U2-2, U2-4Installation menu options U2-4Installation process U2-4Insulation density U5-9Internet Explorer U2-16Intersection stress intensification factors U12-3

KKaux menu U5-32Kaux menu items

Include Piping Input Files U5-34Include structural input files U5-35Review sifs U5-32Review SIFs at Bend Node U5-32Special execution parameters U5-32

Kaux-include structural files U10-7

LLateral bearing length U11-4Leak pressure ratio U12-24Lease 1-9License agreement, CAESAR II 1-2License grant 1-2License types

Full run 1-9Lease 1-9

Limited run 1-9Limitations of remedies 1-3Limited run 1-9Limited warranty 1-3Load case list U6-8Load Case Options Tab U6-21Load Case Report U7-13Load cases U3-2, U3-14, U5-6, U5-7, U5-20,U5-23, U6-7, U6-8, U6-12, U6-13, U6-14, U6-16, U6-18, U6-20, U6-27, U7-2, U7-3, U7-4,U7-12, U7-16, U7-18, U7-19, U7-22, U7-28,U8-11, U8-15, U8-33, U8-41, U9-3, U9-5, U9-8, U9-9, U9-10, U9-11, U10-7, U10-30, U12-12

Basic load cases U3-12Combination load cases U3-12, U6-18Example of load cases U6-18Expansion load case U6-26Occasional load cases U6-26Operating load cases U6-26Recommended load cases U3-11Stress category U6-16Stress types U6-17Sustained load case U6-26Types of load cases U3-12Types of loads U6-16

Load cycles U6-18Load, Ultimate U11-9Loading conditions U5-7Local element forces U7-8Local forces U9-6Local member data U12-44Lumped masses U8-9

MMain menu U4-2

AnalysisMenu items U4-6

File U3-2Default data directory U4-3Input file types U4-4New command U4-3Open command U4-4Select an existing job file U4-4

Input

6


Data entry U3-6Input menu items U4-5

Main show menu U7-19Major steps in dynamics input U8-5Mass and stiffness model U8-5Mass and stiffness model, Modifying U8-13,U8-19, U8-33, U8-35, U8-37Mass correction, Missing U9-11Mass model U8-9, U9-12Mass participation factors U8-41, U9-9Material elastic properties U5-8Material fatigue curve U5-15Material name U5-8Material number U5-8Material yield strength U12-42, U12-46Max U6-25Maximum Code Stress U7-25Maximum desired unity check U12-43Maximum Displacements U7-24Maximum Restraints Loads U7-25Member data, Local U12-44Member end node U12-44Member start node U12-44Member type U12-44Membrane stress U12-14Menu commands U5-22Min U6-25Minimum desired unity check U12-43Missing mass correction U9-11Modal U8-9Modal analysis U8-2Modal analysis input

Control parametersCutoff frequency U8-10Modes of vibration U8-10

Lumped masses U8-9Modes of vibration U8-9Natural frequencies U8-9System response U8-9

Mass model U8-9Modes of vibration U8-9Natural frequencies U8-9System response U8-9

Mode identification line U9-5Mode shapes U8-2, U8-40

Model menu U5-27Model menu items

Expansion joints U5-28Hanger design control data U5-30Title U5-29Valve U5-28

Model modifications for dynamic analysis U8-3

Control parameter U8-5Dynamics U8-5

Conversion from static input U8-5Mass and stiffness model U8-5

Friction effects U8-4Friction restraints U8-4Friction stiffness U8-4Nonlinear restraints in dynamics U8-3

Dynamic responses, nonlinear effectsU8-3

Nonlinear supports U8-3Static load case for nonlinear restraint

U8-3Specifying loads U8-5

Code compliance U8-5Driving frequencies U8-5Dynamic load specification U8-5Force set specification U8-5Harmonic analysis U8-5Load cases U8-5Natural frequencies U8-5Occasional stresses U8-5Point loads U8-5Shock results U8-5Static results U8-5

Modes U8-39Modes mass normalized U9-10Modes of vibration U8-9, U8-10, U8-39Modes unity normalized U9-10Modifying mass and stiffness model U8-13,U8-19, U8-33, U8-35, U8-37Motion U7-28

NNatural frequencies U8-5, U8-9, U8-39, U9-10NEMA SM23

Steam turbines

7


Cumulative equipment calculations,NEMA SM23 U12-50

NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) U12-50NEMA turbine example U12-51Network ESLs U2-21Node Names U5-21Node numbers U5-3Nominal pipe size U5-5Nonlinear effects U8-3Nonlinear restraint status U8-3Nonlinear restraints U6-14, U9-12Nonlinear supports U8-3Note dialog U6-5Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a FileU7-16Novell file server ESL installation U2-20Novell workstation ESL installation U2-20NOZZLE CALCULATIONS U12-50Nozzle data U12-12Nozzle flexibility U12-18Nozzle loads U12-13Nozzle screen U12-17

OOccasional dynamic stresses U8-18Occasional load cases U6-26Occasional stress U8-2, U8-5, U8-18ODBC drivers U2-15Offsets U5-21Online documentation U2-19Operating conditions

Temperatures and pressures U5-5Operating load cases U6-26Out-of-plane bending moment U12-47Out-of-plane large bending moment U12-47Out-of-plane small bending moment U12-47Output

Plotting U7-18Output menu U4-7Output Type U6-22Ovalization, bends U12-6Overstress U7-25

PPeak stress index U12-7

Performing the analysis U8-39Phase angle U8-2, U8-12, U8-40Phasing U8-12Pipe modeler U11-3Pipe section properties U5-5Piping codes for earthquakes U8-18Piping dimensions U10-16Piping input U3-5

Alpha tolerance U5-6Ambient temperature U5-6Construction element U5-6Densities U5-8Expansion joints U5-7Input spreadsheet U5-2Insulation density U5-9Material name U5-8Material number U5-8Nominal pipe size U5-5Rigid elements U5-6Sif & tees U5-7Specific gravity U5-8Stress intensification factors U5-7Thermal strains U5-6

Piping input generation U3-5Piping job U10-7Piping material U5-8Plot U5-36Plot results U7-19Plotting

Static output review U3-14Tutorial U3-9

Plotting static results U7-18Point loads U8-5Pressure stiffening U12-6Pressure thrust U5-10Pressure vs. elevation table U6-9Pressure wave U8-12Printing or saving reports to a file U9-13Proctor number U11-11Produced Results Data U6-22Product demos U2-16Product information U2-19Program improvements 1-10Program support 1-5

Technical support phone numbers 1-5

8


Training 1-5Program support/user assistance 1-5Providing wind data U6-9Pulse table/DLF spectrum generation U8-21,U8-35

QQuick start U3-2

RReciprocating pumps U8-12Recommended load cases U6-26Recommended load cases for hanger selectionU6-27Recommended procedures U11-12Relief load synthesis U8-20Relief load synthesizer U8-35Relief loads (spectrum) U8-20Relief loads spectrum

Force sets for relief loadsEarthquakes U8-32Relief valves U8-32Skewed load U8-32Water hammer U8-32

Relief load synthesisDynamic load factor U8-20Force spectrum methodology U8-20Relief valve U8-20Thrust loads U8-20

Spectrum definitionsDLF spectrum generator U8-31Spectrum data U8-31

Spectrum load casesImpulse U8-33Time history U8-33

Relief valve U8-2, U8-20, U8-32, U8-35Remaining strength of corroded pipe-lines,B31g U12-28Report options U7-6Report types U9-5Resize members U12-43Response spectrum method U8-2Response spectrum table U8-14Response vs. frequency spectra U8-2Restrained weight U6-27

Restraint auxiliary data U10-23Restraint summary U7-7Restraints U5-11, U7-6, U9-5Restraints submenu U7-20Rigid elements U5-6Rigid weight U5-10Rotating equipment U8-2, U8-12

SSample input U10-11Save Animation to File U9-15Scalar U6-24Screens U5-9Seismic analysis U8-2Select Case Names U7-4Selection of phase angles U8-40Serial number U2-5Shape factor, wind U6-9Shock definition U8-14Shock results U8-5Shock spectra U8-2Show Event Viewer Gr U7-24Sidesway U12-42Sidesway, AISC U12-42SIFs & tees U5-7SignMax U6-25SignMin U6-25Skewed load U8-32Slug flow

Specifying the loadForce sets, slug flow U8-35Force-time profile U8-35Load cases, slug flow U8-35Relief load synthesizer U8-35Relief valve U8-35Water hammer U8-35

Slug flow analysis U8-2Snubbers U8-10Snubbers Active U6-23Software revision procedures 1-6Soil model U11-9Soil model numbers U11-9Soil Models U11-8Soil properties U11-2Soil stiffnesses U11-2

9


Soil supports U11-9Sorted stresses U7-10Special element information U5-6Special execution parameters U5-32Specific gravity U5-8Specifying hydrodynamic parameters U6-11Specifying loads, dynamics U8-5Specifying the loads U8-9, U8-11, U8-14, U8-20, U8-35, U8-36Spectrum U8-41Spectrum analysis U8-2Spectrum data U8-14, U8-31Spectrum definitions U8-31, U8-35Spectrum load cases U8-16, U8-33, U8-35, U9-3Spectrum name U8-14Spectrum results U9-3Spreadsheet overview U5-2Spring hanger design U6-27SRSS U6-24Srss U8-18Start run U6-2Start, CAESAR II U3-2Starting CAESAR II U3-2Static analysis

Analyze command U3-13Static load case number U8-18Static load cases

Building static load cases U6-8Limitations of the load case editor U6-7Recommended load cases U6-7

Static output plot U10-25Static output processor

132 column reports U7-5Animation of static solution U7-4, U7-5Commands in static output U7-4Initiating the static output processor U7-2Output options in plotted results U7-18Plotting statics U7-5Report options U7-2Report titles U7-2Show command U7-19Table of contents U7-17View-reports U7-4

Static output review U3-14

Plotting static output U3-14Static results U8-5Static solution methodology U6-12

Archive U6-14Incore solution

Bandwidth U6-13Nonlinear restraints U6-14

Static analysisStiffness matrix U6-12

Static/dynamic combinations U8-18, U8-33,U8-35, U8-37, U9-3Stiffness matrix U6-12Stiffness model, Modifying U8-13, U8-19, U8-33, U8-35, U8-37Stress U6-23Stress category U6-16Stress concentration factor U12-7Stress concentrations and intensifications U12-7Stress increase factor

AISC U12-41Stress increase factor, Allowable U12-41Stress intensification factors U5-7, U9-7Stress intensification factors/tees U5-18Stress reduction factors cmy and cmz U12-42Stress reduction factors, aisc U12-42Stress report U9-7Stress submenu U7-22Stress types U3-12, U6-7, U6-8, U6-17, U6-18,U8-17Stresses U7-9, U9-7Stresses, Allowable U5-15Structural capability in CAESAR II U10-2Structural code U12-41Structural code, AISC U12-41Structural files, Include U5-35Structural steel checks - AISC U12-40Structural steel example U10-11, U10-15,U10-27Structural steel input U10-2

AISC database, structural steel input U10-5Connecting pipe to structure U10-22

Connecting nodes U10-22Displaced shape U10-24

Editing structural steel input U10-4

10


End connections,structural steel input U10-7

Format of structural steel input U10-3Include in piping job U10-7

Include a structural model U10-7Kaux-include structural files U10-7

Index numbers, structural steel input U10-5Initiate structural steel input

Structural element preprocessor U10-2Initiating structural steel input U10-3

Help functions U10-3Keywords in structural steel input U10-4Running structural steel input U10-7Static output plot U10-25

Range command U10-26Structure dimensions U10-17Structure nodes U10-17Sturm sequence check U8-39Sustained load cases U6-26Sustained stresses U8-2, U8-18Sustained sustained load cases U3-11System and hardware requirements U2-3System requirements U2-3System response U8-9, U9-11

TTask bar U2-8Technical reference manual 1-4Technical support phone numbers 1-5Term 1-2The Spectrum Wizard U8-21Thermal load case U6-26Thermal strains U5-6Thrust loads U8-20Time history U8-33, U8-36, U8-41

Force-time profiles U8-36Vibration U8-36

Time history analysis U8-3Time history load case U9-3Time history load cases U8-16, U8-37Time history profile definitions U8-36Time history results U9-3Time vs. force U8-36Title U5-29Tools menu U4-8

Training 1-5Trunnion U12-6, U12-7Tutorial

Center of gravity report, tutorial U3-11Plotting, tutorial U3-9Sample model input, tutorial U3-6

UUBC U8-22Underground pipe modeler U11-2, U11-3Underground pipe/buried pipe

Bilinear supports U11-9Bilinear springs U11-9Soil supports U11-9Ultimate load U11-9Yield displacement U11-9Yield stiffness U11-9

Convert input command U11-8Element length U11-4

Buried pipe displacements U11-4Lateral bearing length U11-4

MeshingLateral bearing meshes U11-7

Overburden Compaction Multiplier U11-11

Overburden compaction multiplierBackfill U11-11Backfill efficiency U11-11Proctor number U11-11

Soil model numbers U11-9Spreadsheet

Buried element descriptions U11-3Underground pipe modeler U11-2

Buried pipe restraints U11-3Soil properties U11-2Soil stiffnesses U11-2

Zones U11-5Lateral bearing regions U11-5

Undo/Redo in the Input Module U5-2Uniform loads U5-13Unsupported axial length U12-46Unsupported length (in-plane bending) U12-46Unsupported length (out-of-plane bending)U12-46Updates and license types 1-9

11


Usage factor U9-8User assistance

Technical support phone numbers 1-5Training 1-5

User Defined Time History Waveform U8-28

VValve U5-28Velocity vs. elevation table U6-9Vertical in-line pumps U12-63Vessel attachment stresses/WRC 107

Input data, WRC 107 U12-10Nozzel loads, WRC 107

Curve Extrapolation U12-13Interactive Control U12-13

Nozzle data, WRC 107 U12-12Nozzle loads, WRC 107 U12-13Reinforcing pad U12-9Stress summations, WRC 107

Bending stress U12-14Membrane stress U12-14

Vessel data U12-11Vibration U8-2, U8-36

WWarning dialog U6-4Water hammer U8-32

Specifying the loadForce sets, slug flow U8-35Force-time profile U8-35Load cases, slug flow U8-35

Relief load synthesizer U8-35Relief valve U8-35Slug problems U8-35

Water hammer analysis U8-2Water hammer/slug flow (spectrum) U8-35Website U2-18Welding Research Council Bulletin 297 U12-16Wind data

ASCE #7 wind loads U6-10Methods of wind loading U6-9Pressure vs. elevation table U6-9Shape factor U6-9Velocity vs. elevation table U6-9

Wind/wave U5-14Windows server installation U2-20WRC 107 (vessel stresses) U12-8WRC 107 stress summations U12-13WRC 297

Nozzle flexibility U12-18Nozzle screen U12-17

WRC axes orientation U12-9

YYield displacement U11-9Yield stiffness U11-9Young’s modulus U12-42, U12-46

ZZone definitions U11-5Zoom to Selection U7-24

12

COADE, Inc.

12777 Jones Rd., Suite 480

Houston, Texas 77070

Phone: (281)890-4566

Fax: (281)890-3301

E-mail: [email protected]

WWW: www.coade.com

CAESAR II

U S E R ' S G U I D E

V E R S I O N 4.50

( L A S T R E V I S E D 11/2003 )

•

caesar ii user guide

Documents